]> git.ipfire.org Git - thirdparty/binutils-gdb.git/blob - gas/doc/as.texi
IBM zSystems: Add support for z16 as CPU name.
[thirdparty/binutils-gdb.git] / gas / doc / as.texi
1 \input texinfo @c -*-Texinfo-*-
2 @c Copyright (C) 1991-2022 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
3 @c UPDATE!! On future updates--
4 @c (1) check for new machine-dep cmdline options in
5 @c md_parse_option definitions in config/tc-*.c
6 @c (2) for platform-specific directives, examine md_pseudo_op
7 @c in config/tc-*.c
8 @c (3) for object-format specific directives, examine obj_pseudo_op
9 @c in config/obj-*.c
10 @c (4) portable directives in potable[] in read.c
11 @c %**start of header
12 @setfilename as.info
13 @c ---config---
14 @macro gcctabopt{body}
15 @code{\body\}
16 @end macro
17 @c defaults, config file may override:
18 @set have-stabs
19 @c ---
20 @c man begin NAME
21 @c ---
22 @include asconfig.texi
23 @include bfdver.texi
24 @c ---
25 @c man end
26 @c ---
27 @c common OR combinations of conditions
28 @ifset COFF
29 @set COFF-ELF
30 @end ifset
31 @ifset ELF
32 @set COFF-ELF
33 @end ifset
34 @ifset AOUT
35 @set aout
36 @end ifset
37 @ifset ARM/Thumb
38 @set ARM
39 @end ifset
40 @ifset Blackfin
41 @set Blackfin
42 @end ifset
43 @ifset BPF
44 @set BPF
45 @end ifset
46 @ifset H8/300
47 @set H8
48 @end ifset
49 @ifset SH
50 @set H8
51 @end ifset
52 @ifset HPPA
53 @set abnormal-separator
54 @end ifset
55 @c ------------
56 @ifset GENERIC
57 @settitle Using @value{AS}
58 @end ifset
59 @ifclear GENERIC
60 @settitle Using @value{AS} (@value{TARGET})
61 @end ifclear
62 @setchapternewpage odd
63 @c %**end of header
64
65 @c @smallbook
66 @c @set SMALL
67 @c WARE! Some of the machine-dependent sections contain tables of machine
68 @c instructions. Except in multi-column format, these tables look silly.
69 @c Unfortunately, Texinfo doesn't have a general-purpose multi-col format, so
70 @c the multi-col format is faked within @example sections.
71 @c
72 @c Again unfortunately, the natural size that fits on a page, for these tables,
73 @c is different depending on whether or not smallbook is turned on.
74 @c This matters, because of order: text flow switches columns at each page
75 @c break.
76 @c
77 @c The format faked in this source works reasonably well for smallbook,
78 @c not well for the default large-page format. This manual expects that if you
79 @c turn on @smallbook, you will also uncomment the "@set SMALL" to enable the
80 @c tables in question. You can turn on one without the other at your
81 @c discretion, of course.
82 @ifinfo
83 @set SMALL
84 @c the insn tables look just as silly in info files regardless of smallbook,
85 @c might as well show 'em anyways.
86 @end ifinfo
87
88 @ifnottex
89 @dircategory Software development
90 @direntry
91 * As: (as). The GNU assembler.
92 * Gas: (as). The GNU assembler.
93 @end direntry
94 @end ifnottex
95
96 @finalout
97 @syncodeindex ky cp
98
99 @copying
100 This file documents the GNU Assembler "@value{AS}".
101
102 @c man begin COPYRIGHT
103 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2022 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
104
105 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
106 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
107 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
108 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
109 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
110 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
111
112 @c man end
113 @end copying
114
115 @titlepage
116 @title Using @value{AS}
117 @subtitle The @sc{gnu} Assembler
118 @ifclear GENERIC
119 @subtitle for the @value{TARGET} family
120 @end ifclear
121 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
122 @sp 1
123 @subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
124 @end ifset
125 @sp 1
126 @subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
127 @sp 1
128 @sp 13
129 The Free Software Foundation Inc.@: thanks The Nice Computer
130 Company of Australia for loaning Dean Elsner to write the
131 first (Vax) version of @command{as} for Project @sc{gnu}.
132 The proprietors, management and staff of TNCCA thank FSF for
133 distracting the boss while they got some work
134 done.
135 @sp 3
136 @author Dean Elsner, Jay Fenlason & friends
137 @page
138 @tex
139 {\parskip=0pt
140 \hfill {\it Using {\tt @value{AS}}}\par
141 \hfill Edited by Cygnus Support\par
142 }
143 %"boxit" macro for figures:
144 %Modified from Knuth's ``boxit'' macro from TeXbook (answer to exercise 21.3)
145 \gdef\boxit#1#2{\vbox{\hrule\hbox{\vrule\kern3pt
146 \vbox{\parindent=0pt\parskip=0pt\hsize=#1\kern3pt\strut\hfil
147 #2\hfil\strut\kern3pt}\kern3pt\vrule}\hrule}}%box with visible outline
148 \gdef\ibox#1#2{\hbox to #1{#2\hfil}\kern8pt}% invisible box
149 @end tex
150
151 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
152 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2022 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
153
154 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
155 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
156 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
157 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
158 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
159 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
160
161 @end titlepage
162 @contents
163
164 @ifnottex
165 @node Top
166 @top Using @value{AS}
167
168 This file is a user guide to the @sc{gnu} assembler @command{@value{AS}}
169 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
170 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
171 @end ifset
172 version @value{VERSION}.
173 @ifclear GENERIC
174 This version of the file describes @command{@value{AS}} configured to generate
175 code for @value{TARGET} architectures.
176 @end ifclear
177
178 This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
179 Documentation License. A copy of the license is included in the
180 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
181
182 @menu
183 * Overview:: Overview
184 * Invoking:: Command-Line Options
185 * Syntax:: Syntax
186 * Sections:: Sections and Relocation
187 * Symbols:: Symbols
188 * Expressions:: Expressions
189 * Pseudo Ops:: Assembler Directives
190 @ifset ELF
191 * Object Attributes:: Object Attributes
192 @end ifset
193 * Machine Dependencies:: Machine Dependent Features
194 * Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
195 * Acknowledgements:: Who Did What
196 * GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
197 * AS Index:: AS Index
198 @end menu
199 @end ifnottex
200
201 @node Overview
202 @chapter Overview
203 @iftex
204 This manual is a user guide to the @sc{gnu} assembler @command{@value{AS}}.
205 @ifclear GENERIC
206 This version of the manual describes @command{@value{AS}} configured to generate
207 code for @value{TARGET} architectures.
208 @end ifclear
209 @end iftex
210
211 @cindex invocation summary
212 @cindex option summary
213 @cindex summary of options
214 Here is a brief summary of how to invoke @command{@value{AS}}. For details,
215 see @ref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}.
216
217 @c man title AS the portable GNU assembler.
218
219 @ignore
220 @c man begin SEEALSO
221 gcc(1), ld(1), and the Info entries for @file{binutils} and @file{ld}.
222 @c man end
223 @end ignore
224
225 @c We don't use deffn and friends for the following because they seem
226 @c to be limited to one line for the header.
227 @smallexample
228 @c man begin SYNOPSIS
229 @value{AS} [@b{-a}[@b{cdghlns}][=@var{file}]] [@b{--alternate}] [@b{-D}]
230 [@b{--compress-debug-sections}] [@b{--nocompress-debug-sections}]
231 [@b{--debug-prefix-map} @var{old}=@var{new}]
232 [@b{--defsym} @var{sym}=@var{val}] [@b{-f}] [@b{-g}] [@b{--gstabs}]
233 [@b{--gstabs+}] [@b{--gdwarf-<N>}] [@b{--gdwarf-sections}]
234 [@b{--gdwarf-cie-version}=@var{VERSION}]
235 [@b{--help}] [@b{-I} @var{dir}] [@b{-J}]
236 [@b{-K}] [@b{-L}] [@b{--listing-lhs-width}=@var{NUM}]
237 [@b{--listing-lhs-width2}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--listing-rhs-width}=@var{NUM}]
238 [@b{--listing-cont-lines}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--keep-locals}]
239 [@b{--no-pad-sections}]
240 [@b{-o} @var{objfile}] [@b{-R}]
241 [@b{--statistics}]
242 [@b{-v}] [@b{-version}] [@b{--version}]
243 [@b{-W}] [@b{--warn}] [@b{--fatal-warnings}] [@b{-w}] [@b{-x}]
244 [@b{-Z}] [@b{@@@var{FILE}}]
245 [@b{--sectname-subst}] [@b{--size-check=[error|warning]}]
246 [@b{--elf-stt-common=[no|yes]}]
247 [@b{--generate-missing-build-notes=[no|yes]}]
248 [@b{--multibyte-handling=[allow|warn|warn-sym-only]}]
249 [@b{--target-help}] [@var{target-options}]
250 [@b{--}|@var{files} @dots{}]
251 @c
252 @c man end
253 @c Target dependent options are listed below. Keep the list sorted.
254 @c Add an empty line for separation.
255 @c man begin TARGET
256 @ifset AARCH64
257
258 @emph{Target AArch64 options:}
259 [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
260 [@b{-mabi}=@var{ABI}]
261 @end ifset
262 @ifset ALPHA
263
264 @emph{Target Alpha options:}
265 [@b{-m@var{cpu}}]
266 [@b{-mdebug} | @b{-no-mdebug}]
267 [@b{-replace} | @b{-noreplace}]
268 [@b{-relax}] [@b{-g}] [@b{-G@var{size}}]
269 [@b{-F}] [@b{-32addr}]
270 @end ifset
271 @ifset ARC
272
273 @emph{Target ARC options:}
274 [@b{-mcpu=@var{cpu}}]
275 [@b{-mA6}|@b{-mARC600}|@b{-mARC601}|@b{-mA7}|@b{-mARC700}|@b{-mEM}|@b{-mHS}]
276 [@b{-mcode-density}]
277 [@b{-mrelax}]
278 [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
279 @end ifset
280 @ifset ARM
281
282 @emph{Target ARM options:}
283 @c Don't document the deprecated options
284 [@b{-mcpu}=@var{processor}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]]
285 [@b{-march}=@var{architecture}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]]
286 [@b{-mfpu}=@var{floating-point-format}]
287 [@b{-mfloat-abi}=@var{abi}]
288 [@b{-meabi}=@var{ver}]
289 [@b{-mthumb}]
290 [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
291 [@b{-mapcs-32}|@b{-mapcs-26}|@b{-mapcs-float}|
292 @b{-mapcs-reentrant}]
293 [@b{-mthumb-interwork}] [@b{-k}]
294 @end ifset
295 @ifset Blackfin
296
297 @emph{Target Blackfin options:}
298 [@b{-mcpu}=@var{processor}[-@var{sirevision}]]
299 [@b{-mfdpic}]
300 [@b{-mno-fdpic}]
301 [@b{-mnopic}]
302 @end ifset
303 @ifset BPF
304
305 @emph{Target BPF options:}
306 [@b{-EL}] [@b{-EB}]
307 @end ifset
308 @ifset CRIS
309
310 @emph{Target CRIS options:}
311 [@b{--underscore} | @b{--no-underscore}]
312 [@b{--pic}] [@b{-N}]
313 [@b{--emulation=criself} | @b{--emulation=crisaout}]
314 [@b{--march=v0_v10} | @b{--march=v10} | @b{--march=v32} | @b{--march=common_v10_v32}]
315 @c Deprecated -- deliberately not documented.
316 @c [@b{-h}] [@b{-H}]
317 @end ifset
318 @ifset CSKY
319
320 @emph{Target C-SKY options:}
321 [@b{-march=@var{arch}}] [@b{-mcpu=@var{cpu}}]
322 [@b{-EL}] [@b{-mlittle-endian}] [@b{-EB}] [@b{-mbig-endian}]
323 [@b{-fpic}] [@b{-pic}]
324 [@b{-mljump}] [@b{-mno-ljump}]
325 [@b{-force2bsr}] [@b{-mforce2bsr}] [@b{-no-force2bsr}] [@b{-mno-force2bsr}]
326 [@b{-jsri2bsr}] [@b{-mjsri2bsr}] [@b{-no-jsri2bsr }] [@b{-mno-jsri2bsr}]
327 [@b{-mnolrw }] [@b{-mno-lrw}]
328 [@b{-melrw}] [@b{-mno-elrw}]
329 [@b{-mlaf }] [@b{-mliterals-after-func}]
330 [@b{-mno-laf}] [@b{-mno-literals-after-func}]
331 [@b{-mlabr}] [@b{-mliterals-after-br}]
332 [@b{-mno-labr}] [@b{-mnoliterals-after-br}]
333 [@b{-mistack}] [@b{-mno-istack}]
334 [@b{-mhard-float}] [@b{-mmp}] [@b{-mcp}] [@b{-mcache}]
335 [@b{-msecurity}] [@b{-mtrust}]
336 [@b{-mdsp}] [@b{-medsp}] [@b{-mvdsp}]
337 @end ifset
338 @ifset D10V
339
340 @emph{Target D10V options:}
341 [@b{-O}]
342 @end ifset
343 @ifset D30V
344
345 @emph{Target D30V options:}
346 [@b{-O}|@b{-n}|@b{-N}]
347 @end ifset
348 @ifset EPIPHANY
349
350 @emph{Target EPIPHANY options:}
351 [@b{-mepiphany}|@b{-mepiphany16}]
352 @end ifset
353 @ifset H8
354
355 @emph{Target H8/300 options:}
356 [-h-tick-hex]
357 @end ifset
358 @ifset HPPA
359 @c HPPA has no machine-dependent assembler options (yet).
360 @end ifset
361 @ifset I80386
362
363 @emph{Target i386 options:}
364 [@b{--32}|@b{--x32}|@b{--64}] [@b{-n}]
365 [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}[+@var{EXTENSION}@dots{}]] [@b{-mtune}=@var{CPU}]
366 @end ifset
367 @ifset IA64
368
369 @emph{Target IA-64 options:}
370 [@b{-mconstant-gp}|@b{-mauto-pic}]
371 [@b{-milp32}|@b{-milp64}|@b{-mlp64}|@b{-mp64}]
372 [@b{-mle}|@b{mbe}]
373 [@b{-mtune=itanium1}|@b{-mtune=itanium2}]
374 [@b{-munwind-check=warning}|@b{-munwind-check=error}]
375 [@b{-mhint.b=ok}|@b{-mhint.b=warning}|@b{-mhint.b=error}]
376 [@b{-x}|@b{-xexplicit}] [@b{-xauto}] [@b{-xdebug}]
377 @end ifset
378 @ifset IP2K
379
380 @emph{Target IP2K options:}
381 [@b{-mip2022}|@b{-mip2022ext}]
382 @end ifset
383 @ifset LOONGARCH
384
385 @emph{Target LOONGARCH options:}
386 [@b{-fpic}|@b{-fPIC}|@b{-fno-pic}]
387 @end ifset
388 @ifset M32C
389
390 @emph{Target M32C options:}
391 [@b{-m32c}|@b{-m16c}] [-relax] [-h-tick-hex]
392 @end ifset
393 @ifset M32R
394
395 @emph{Target M32R options:}
396 [@b{--m32rx}|@b{--[no-]warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts}|
397 @b{--W[n]p}]
398 @end ifset
399 @ifset M680X0
400
401 @emph{Target M680X0 options:}
402 [@b{-l}] [@b{-m68000}|@b{-m68010}|@b{-m68020}|@dots{}]
403 @end ifset
404 @ifset M68HC11
405
406 @emph{Target M68HC11 options:}
407 [@b{-m68hc11}|@b{-m68hc12}|@b{-m68hcs12}|@b{-mm9s12x}|@b{-mm9s12xg}]
408 [@b{-mshort}|@b{-mlong}]
409 [@b{-mshort-double}|@b{-mlong-double}]
410 [@b{--force-long-branches}] [@b{--short-branches}]
411 [@b{--strict-direct-mode}] [@b{--print-insn-syntax}]
412 [@b{--print-opcodes}] [@b{--generate-example}]
413 @end ifset
414 @ifset MCORE
415
416 @emph{Target MCORE options:}
417 [@b{-jsri2bsr}] [@b{-sifilter}] [@b{-relax}]
418 [@b{-mcpu=[210|340]}]
419 @end ifset
420 @ifset METAG
421
422 @emph{Target Meta options:}
423 [@b{-mcpu=@var{cpu}}] [@b{-mfpu=@var{cpu}}] [@b{-mdsp=@var{cpu}}]
424 @end ifset
425 @ifset MICROBLAZE
426 @emph{Target MICROBLAZE options:}
427 @c MicroBlaze has no machine-dependent assembler options.
428 @end ifset
429 @ifset MIPS
430
431 @emph{Target MIPS options:}
432 [@b{-nocpp}] [@b{-EL}] [@b{-EB}] [@b{-O}[@var{optimization level}]]
433 [@b{-g}[@var{debug level}]] [@b{-G} @var{num}] [@b{-KPIC}] [@b{-call_shared}]
434 [@b{-non_shared}] [@b{-xgot} [@b{-mvxworks-pic}]
435 [@b{-mabi}=@var{ABI}] [@b{-32}] [@b{-n32}] [@b{-64}] [@b{-mfp32}] [@b{-mgp32}]
436 [@b{-mfp64}] [@b{-mgp64}] [@b{-mfpxx}]
437 [@b{-modd-spreg}] [@b{-mno-odd-spreg}]
438 [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}] [@b{-mtune}=@var{CPU}] [@b{-mips1}] [@b{-mips2}]
439 [@b{-mips3}] [@b{-mips4}] [@b{-mips5}] [@b{-mips32}] [@b{-mips32r2}]
440 [@b{-mips32r3}] [@b{-mips32r5}] [@b{-mips32r6}] [@b{-mips64}] [@b{-mips64r2}]
441 [@b{-mips64r3}] [@b{-mips64r5}] [@b{-mips64r6}]
442 [@b{-construct-floats}] [@b{-no-construct-floats}]
443 [@b{-mignore-branch-isa}] [@b{-mno-ignore-branch-isa}]
444 [@b{-mnan=@var{encoding}}]
445 [@b{-trap}] [@b{-no-break}] [@b{-break}] [@b{-no-trap}]
446 [@b{-mips16}] [@b{-no-mips16}]
447 [@b{-mmips16e2}] [@b{-mno-mips16e2}]
448 [@b{-mmicromips}] [@b{-mno-micromips}]
449 [@b{-msmartmips}] [@b{-mno-smartmips}]
450 [@b{-mips3d}] [@b{-no-mips3d}]
451 [@b{-mdmx}] [@b{-no-mdmx}]
452 [@b{-mdsp}] [@b{-mno-dsp}]
453 [@b{-mdspr2}] [@b{-mno-dspr2}]
454 [@b{-mdspr3}] [@b{-mno-dspr3}]
455 [@b{-mmsa}] [@b{-mno-msa}]
456 [@b{-mxpa}] [@b{-mno-xpa}]
457 [@b{-mmt}] [@b{-mno-mt}]
458 [@b{-mmcu}] [@b{-mno-mcu}]
459 [@b{-mcrc}] [@b{-mno-crc}]
460 [@b{-mginv}] [@b{-mno-ginv}]
461 [@b{-mloongson-mmi}] [@b{-mno-loongson-mmi}]
462 [@b{-mloongson-cam}] [@b{-mno-loongson-cam}]
463 [@b{-mloongson-ext}] [@b{-mno-loongson-ext}]
464 [@b{-mloongson-ext2}] [@b{-mno-loongson-ext2}]
465 [@b{-minsn32}] [@b{-mno-insn32}]
466 [@b{-mfix7000}] [@b{-mno-fix7000}]
467 [@b{-mfix-rm7000}] [@b{-mno-fix-rm7000}]
468 [@b{-mfix-vr4120}] [@b{-mno-fix-vr4120}]
469 [@b{-mfix-vr4130}] [@b{-mno-fix-vr4130}]
470 [@b{-mfix-r5900}] [@b{-mno-fix-r5900}]
471 [@b{-mdebug}] [@b{-no-mdebug}]
472 [@b{-mpdr}] [@b{-mno-pdr}]
473 @end ifset
474 @ifset MMIX
475
476 @emph{Target MMIX options:}
477 [@b{--fixed-special-register-names}] [@b{--globalize-symbols}]
478 [@b{--gnu-syntax}] [@b{--relax}] [@b{--no-predefined-symbols}]
479 [@b{--no-expand}] [@b{--no-merge-gregs}] [@b{-x}]
480 [@b{--linker-allocated-gregs}]
481 @end ifset
482 @ifset NIOSII
483
484 @emph{Target Nios II options:}
485 [@b{-relax-all}] [@b{-relax-section}] [@b{-no-relax}]
486 [@b{-EB}] [@b{-EL}]
487 @end ifset
488 @ifset NDS32
489
490 @emph{Target NDS32 options:}
491 [@b{-EL}] [@b{-EB}] [@b{-O}] [@b{-Os}] [@b{-mcpu=@var{cpu}}]
492 [@b{-misa=@var{isa}}] [@b{-mabi=@var{abi}}] [@b{-mall-ext}]
493 [@b{-m[no-]16-bit}] [@b{-m[no-]perf-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]perf2-ext}]
494 [@b{-m[no-]string-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]dsp-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]mac}] [@b{-m[no-]div}]
495 [@b{-m[no-]audio-isa-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]fpu-sp-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]fpu-dp-ext}]
496 [@b{-m[no-]fpu-fma}] [@b{-mfpu-freg=@var{FREG}}] [@b{-mreduced-regs}]
497 [@b{-mfull-regs}] [@b{-m[no-]dx-regs}] [@b{-mpic}] [@b{-mno-relax}]
498 [@b{-mb2bb}]
499 @end ifset
500 @ifset OPENRISC
501 @c OpenRISC has no machine-dependent assembler options.
502 @end ifset
503 @ifset PDP11
504
505 @emph{Target PDP11 options:}
506 [@b{-mpic}|@b{-mno-pic}] [@b{-mall}] [@b{-mno-extensions}]
507 [@b{-m}@var{extension}|@b{-mno-}@var{extension}]
508 [@b{-m}@var{cpu}] [@b{-m}@var{machine}]
509 @end ifset
510 @ifset PJ
511
512 @emph{Target picoJava options:}
513 [@b{-mb}|@b{-me}]
514 @end ifset
515 @ifset PPC
516
517 @emph{Target PowerPC options:}
518 [@b{-a32}|@b{-a64}]
519 [@b{-mpwrx}|@b{-mpwr2}|@b{-mpwr}|@b{-m601}|@b{-mppc}|@b{-mppc32}|@b{-m603}|@b{-m604}|@b{-m403}|@b{-m405}|
520 @b{-m440}|@b{-m464}|@b{-m476}|@b{-m7400}|@b{-m7410}|@b{-m7450}|@b{-m7455}|@b{-m750cl}|@b{-mgekko}|
521 @b{-mbroadway}|@b{-mppc64}|@b{-m620}|@b{-me500}|@b{-e500x2}|@b{-me500mc}|@b{-me500mc64}|@b{-me5500}|
522 @b{-me6500}|@b{-mppc64bridge}|@b{-mbooke}|@b{-mpower4}|@b{-mpwr4}|@b{-mpower5}|@b{-mpwr5}|@b{-mpwr5x}|
523 @b{-mpower6}|@b{-mpwr6}|@b{-mpower7}|@b{-mpwr7}|@b{-mpower8}|@b{-mpwr8}|@b{-mpower9}|@b{-mpwr9}@b{-ma2}|
524 @b{-mcell}|@b{-mspe}|@b{-mspe2}|@b{-mtitan}|@b{-me300}|@b{-mcom}]
525 [@b{-many}] [@b{-maltivec}|@b{-mvsx}|@b{-mhtm}|@b{-mvle}]
526 [@b{-mregnames}|@b{-mno-regnames}]
527 [@b{-mrelocatable}|@b{-mrelocatable-lib}|@b{-K PIC}] [@b{-memb}]
528 [@b{-mlittle}|@b{-mlittle-endian}|@b{-le}|@b{-mbig}|@b{-mbig-endian}|@b{-be}]
529 [@b{-msolaris}|@b{-mno-solaris}]
530 [@b{-nops=@var{count}}]
531 @end ifset
532 @ifset PRU
533
534 @emph{Target PRU options:}
535 [@b{-link-relax}]
536 [@b{-mnolink-relax}]
537 [@b{-mno-warn-regname-label}]
538 @end ifset
539 @ifset RISCV
540
541 @emph{Target RISC-V options:}
542 [@b{-fpic}|@b{-fPIC}|@b{-fno-pic}]
543 [@b{-march}=@var{ISA}]
544 [@b{-mabi}=@var{ABI}]
545 [@b{-mlittle-endian}|@b{-mbig-endian}]
546 @end ifset
547 @ifset RL78
548
549 @emph{Target RL78 options:}
550 [@b{-mg10}]
551 [@b{-m32bit-doubles}|@b{-m64bit-doubles}]
552 @end ifset
553 @ifset RX
554
555 @emph{Target RX options:}
556 [@b{-mlittle-endian}|@b{-mbig-endian}]
557 [@b{-m32bit-doubles}|@b{-m64bit-doubles}]
558 [@b{-muse-conventional-section-names}]
559 [@b{-msmall-data-limit}]
560 [@b{-mpid}]
561 [@b{-mrelax}]
562 [@b{-mint-register=@var{number}}]
563 [@b{-mgcc-abi}|@b{-mrx-abi}]
564 @end ifset
565 @ifset S390
566
567 @emph{Target s390 options:}
568 [@b{-m31}|@b{-m64}] [@b{-mesa}|@b{-mzarch}] [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}]
569 [@b{-mregnames}|@b{-mno-regnames}]
570 [@b{-mwarn-areg-zero}]
571 @end ifset
572 @ifset SCORE
573
574 @emph{Target SCORE options:}
575 [@b{-EB}][@b{-EL}][@b{-FIXDD}][@b{-NWARN}]
576 [@b{-SCORE5}][@b{-SCORE5U}][@b{-SCORE7}][@b{-SCORE3}]
577 [@b{-march=score7}][@b{-march=score3}]
578 [@b{-USE_R1}][@b{-KPIC}][@b{-O0}][@b{-G} @var{num}][@b{-V}]
579 @end ifset
580 @ifset SPARC
581
582 @emph{Target SPARC options:}
583 @c The order here is important. See c-sparc.texi.
584 [@b{-Av6}|@b{-Av7}|@b{-Av8}|@b{-Aleon}|@b{-Asparclet}|@b{-Asparclite}
585 @b{-Av8plus}|@b{-Av8plusa}|@b{-Av8plusb}|@b{-Av8plusc}|@b{-Av8plusd}
586 @b{-Av8plusv}|@b{-Av8plusm}|@b{-Av9}|@b{-Av9a}|@b{-Av9b}|@b{-Av9c}
587 @b{-Av9d}|@b{-Av9e}|@b{-Av9v}|@b{-Av9m}|@b{-Asparc}|@b{-Asparcvis}
588 @b{-Asparcvis2}|@b{-Asparcfmaf}|@b{-Asparcima}|@b{-Asparcvis3}
589 @b{-Asparcvisr}|@b{-Asparc5}]
590 [@b{-xarch=v8plus}|@b{-xarch=v8plusa}]|@b{-xarch=v8plusb}|@b{-xarch=v8plusc}
591 @b{-xarch=v8plusd}|@b{-xarch=v8plusv}|@b{-xarch=v8plusm}|@b{-xarch=v9}
592 @b{-xarch=v9a}|@b{-xarch=v9b}|@b{-xarch=v9c}|@b{-xarch=v9d}|@b{-xarch=v9e}
593 @b{-xarch=v9v}|@b{-xarch=v9m}|@b{-xarch=sparc}|@b{-xarch=sparcvis}
594 @b{-xarch=sparcvis2}|@b{-xarch=sparcfmaf}|@b{-xarch=sparcima}
595 @b{-xarch=sparcvis3}|@b{-xarch=sparcvisr}|@b{-xarch=sparc5}
596 @b{-bump}]
597 [@b{-32}|@b{-64}]
598 [@b{--enforce-aligned-data}][@b{--dcti-couples-detect}]
599 @end ifset
600 @ifset TIC54X
601
602 @emph{Target TIC54X options:}
603 [@b{-mcpu=54[123589]}|@b{-mcpu=54[56]lp}] [@b{-mfar-mode}|@b{-mf}]
604 [@b{-merrors-to-file} @var{<filename>}|@b{-me} @var{<filename>}]
605 @end ifset
606 @ifset TIC6X
607
608 @emph{Target TIC6X options:}
609 [@b{-march=@var{arch}}] [@b{-mbig-endian}|@b{-mlittle-endian}]
610 [@b{-mdsbt}|@b{-mno-dsbt}] [@b{-mpid=no}|@b{-mpid=near}|@b{-mpid=far}]
611 [@b{-mpic}|@b{-mno-pic}]
612 @end ifset
613 @ifset TILEGX
614
615 @emph{Target TILE-Gx options:}
616 [@b{-m32}|@b{-m64}][@b{-EB}][@b{-EL}]
617 @end ifset
618 @ifset TILEPRO
619 @c TILEPro has no machine-dependent assembler options
620 @end ifset
621 @ifset VISIUM
622
623 @emph{Target Visium options:}
624 [@b{-mtune=@var{arch}}]
625 @end ifset
626 @ifset XTENSA
627
628 @emph{Target Xtensa options:}
629 [@b{--[no-]text-section-literals}] [@b{--[no-]auto-litpools}]
630 [@b{--[no-]absolute-literals}]
631 [@b{--[no-]target-align}] [@b{--[no-]longcalls}]
632 [@b{--[no-]transform}]
633 [@b{--rename-section} @var{oldname}=@var{newname}]
634 [@b{--[no-]trampolines}]
635 [@b{--abi-windowed}|@b{--abi-call0}]
636 @end ifset
637 @ifset Z80
638
639 @emph{Target Z80 options:}
640 [@b{-march=@var{CPU}@var{[-EXT]}@var{[+EXT]}}]
641 [@b{-local-prefix=}@var{PREFIX}]
642 [@b{-colonless}]
643 [@b{-sdcc}]
644 [@b{-fp-s=}@var{FORMAT}]
645 [@b{-fp-d=}@var{FORMAT}]
646 @end ifset
647 @ifset Z8000
648
649 @c Z8000 has no machine-dependent assembler options
650 @end ifset
651
652 @c man end
653 @end smallexample
654
655 @c man begin OPTIONS
656
657 @table @gcctabopt
658 @include at-file.texi
659
660 @item -a[cdghlmns]
661 Turn on listings, in any of a variety of ways:
662
663 @table @gcctabopt
664 @item -ac
665 omit false conditionals
666
667 @item -ad
668 omit debugging directives
669
670 @item -ag
671 include general information, like @value{AS} version and options passed
672
673 @item -ah
674 include high-level source
675
676 @item -al
677 include assembly
678
679 @item -am
680 include macro expansions
681
682 @item -an
683 omit forms processing
684
685 @item -as
686 include symbols
687
688 @item =file
689 set the name of the listing file
690 @end table
691
692 You may combine these options; for example, use @samp{-aln} for assembly
693 listing without forms processing. The @samp{=file} option, if used, must be
694 the last one. By itself, @samp{-a} defaults to @samp{-ahls}.
695
696 @item --alternate
697 Begin in alternate macro mode.
698 @ifclear man
699 @xref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
700 @end ifclear
701
702 @item --compress-debug-sections
703 Compress DWARF debug sections using zlib with SHF_COMPRESSED from the
704 ELF ABI. The resulting object file may not be compatible with older
705 linkers and object file utilities. Note if compression would make a
706 given section @emph{larger} then it is not compressed.
707
708 @ifset ELF
709 @cindex @samp{--compress-debug-sections=} option
710 @item --compress-debug-sections=none
711 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
712 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
713 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
714 These options control how DWARF debug sections are compressed.
715 @option{--compress-debug-sections=none} is equivalent to
716 @option{--nocompress-debug-sections}.
717 @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib} and
718 @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi} are equivalent to
719 @option{--compress-debug-sections}.
720 @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compresses DWARF debug
721 sections using zlib. The debug sections are renamed to begin with
722 @samp{.zdebug}. Note if compression would make a given section
723 @emph{larger} then it is not compressed nor renamed.
724
725 @end ifset
726
727 @item --nocompress-debug-sections
728 Do not compress DWARF debug sections. This is usually the default for all
729 targets except the x86/x86_64, but a configure time option can be used to
730 override this.
731
732 @item -D
733 Ignored. This option is accepted for script compatibility with calls to
734 other assemblers.
735
736 @item --debug-prefix-map @var{old}=@var{new}
737 When assembling files in directory @file{@var{old}}, record debugging
738 information describing them as in @file{@var{new}} instead.
739
740 @item --defsym @var{sym}=@var{value}
741 Define the symbol @var{sym} to be @var{value} before assembling the input file.
742 @var{value} must be an integer constant. As in C, a leading @samp{0x}
743 indicates a hexadecimal value, and a leading @samp{0} indicates an octal
744 value. The value of the symbol can be overridden inside a source file via the
745 use of a @code{.set} pseudo-op.
746
747 @item -f
748 ``fast''---skip whitespace and comment preprocessing (assume source is
749 compiler output).
750
751 @item -g
752 @itemx --gen-debug
753 Generate debugging information for each assembler source line using whichever
754 debug format is preferred by the target. This currently means either STABS,
755 ECOFF or DWARF2. When the debug format is DWARF then a @code{.debug_info} and
756 @code{.debug_line} section is only emitted when the assembly file doesn't
757 generate one itself.
758
759 @item --gstabs
760 Generate stabs debugging information for each assembler line. This
761 may help debugging assembler code, if the debugger can handle it.
762
763 @item --gstabs+
764 Generate stabs debugging information for each assembler line, with GNU
765 extensions that probably only gdb can handle, and that could make other
766 debuggers crash or refuse to read your program. This
767 may help debugging assembler code. Currently the only GNU extension is
768 the location of the current working directory at assembling time.
769
770 @item --gdwarf-2
771 Generate DWARF2 debugging information for each assembler line. This
772 may help debugging assembler code, if the debugger can handle it. Note---this
773 option is only supported by some targets, not all of them.
774
775 @item --gdwarf-3
776 This option is the same as the @option{--gdwarf-2} option, except that it
777 allows for the possibility of the generation of extra debug information as per
778 version 3 of the DWARF specification. Note - enabling this option does not
779 guarantee the generation of any extra information, the choice to do so is on a
780 per target basis.
781
782 @item --gdwarf-4
783 This option is the same as the @option{--gdwarf-2} option, except that it
784 allows for the possibility of the generation of extra debug information as per
785 version 4 of the DWARF specification. Note - enabling this option does not
786 guarantee the generation of any extra information, the choice to do so is on a
787 per target basis.
788
789 @item --gdwarf-5
790 This option is the same as the @option{--gdwarf-2} option, except that it
791 allows for the possibility of the generation of extra debug information as per
792 version 5 of the DWARF specification. Note - enabling this option does not
793 guarantee the generation of any extra information, the choice to do so is on a
794 per target basis.
795
796 @item --gdwarf-sections
797 Instead of creating a .debug_line section, create a series of
798 .debug_line.@var{foo} sections where @var{foo} is the name of the
799 corresponding code section. For example a code section called @var{.text.func}
800 will have its dwarf line number information placed into a section called
801 @var{.debug_line.text.func}. If the code section is just called @var{.text}
802 then debug line section will still be called just @var{.debug_line} without any
803 suffix.
804
805 @item --gdwarf-cie-version=@var{version}
806 Control which version of DWARF Common Information Entries (CIEs) are produced.
807 When this flag is not specificed the default is version 1, though some targets
808 can modify this default. Other possible values for @var{version} are 3 or 4.
809
810 @ifset ELF
811 @item --size-check=error
812 @itemx --size-check=warning
813 Issue an error or warning for invalid ELF .size directive.
814
815 @item --elf-stt-common=no
816 @itemx --elf-stt-common=yes
817 These options control whether the ELF assembler should generate common
818 symbols with the @code{STT_COMMON} type. The default can be controlled
819 by a configure option @option{--enable-elf-stt-common}.
820
821 @item --generate-missing-build-notes=yes
822 @itemx --generate-missing-build-notes=no
823 These options control whether the ELF assembler should generate GNU Build
824 attribute notes if none are present in the input sources.
825 The default can be controlled by the @option{--enable-generate-build-notes}
826 configure option.
827
828 @end ifset
829
830 @item --help
831 Print a summary of the command-line options and exit.
832
833 @item --target-help
834 Print a summary of all target specific options and exit.
835
836 @item -I @var{dir}
837 Add directory @var{dir} to the search list for @code{.include} directives.
838
839 @item -J
840 Don't warn about signed overflow.
841
842 @item -K
843 @ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
844 This option is accepted but has no effect on the @value{TARGET} family.
845 @end ifclear
846 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
847 Issue warnings when difference tables altered for long displacements.
848 @end ifset
849
850 @item -L
851 @itemx --keep-locals
852 Keep (in the symbol table) local symbols. These symbols start with
853 system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
854 or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.
855 @ifclear man
856 @xref{Symbol Names}.
857 @end ifclear
858
859 @item --listing-lhs-width=@var{number}
860 Set the maximum width, in words, of the output data column for an assembler
861 listing to @var{number}.
862
863 @item --listing-lhs-width2=@var{number}
864 Set the maximum width, in words, of the output data column for continuation
865 lines in an assembler listing to @var{number}.
866
867 @item --listing-rhs-width=@var{number}
868 Set the maximum width of an input source line, as displayed in a listing, to
869 @var{number} bytes.
870
871 @item --listing-cont-lines=@var{number}
872 Set the maximum number of lines printed in a listing for a single line of input
873 to @var{number} + 1.
874
875 @item --multibyte-handling=allow
876 @itemx --multibyte-handling=warn
877 @itemx --multibyte-handling=warn-sym-only
878 Controls how the assembler handles multibyte characters in the input. The
879 default (which can be restored by using the @option{allow} argument) is to
880 allow such characters without complaint. Using the @option{warn} argument will
881 make the assembler generate a warning message whenever any multibyte character
882 is encountered. Using the @option{warn-sym-only} argument will only cause a
883 warning to be generated when a symbol is defined with a name that contains
884 multibyte characters. (References to undefined symbols will not generate a
885 warning).
886
887 @item --no-pad-sections
888 Stop the assembler for padding the ends of output sections to the alignment
889 of that section. The default is to pad the sections, but this can waste space
890 which might be needed on targets which have tight memory constraints.
891
892 @item -o @var{objfile}
893 Name the object-file output from @command{@value{AS}} @var{objfile}.
894
895 @item -R
896 Fold the data section into the text section.
897
898 @ifset ELF
899 @item --sectname-subst
900 Honor substitution sequences in section names.
901 @ifclear man
902 @xref{Section Name Substitutions,,@code{.section @var{name}}}.
903 @end ifclear
904 @end ifset
905
906 @item --statistics
907 Print the maximum space (in bytes) and total time (in seconds) used by
908 assembly.
909
910 @item --strip-local-absolute
911 Remove local absolute symbols from the outgoing symbol table.
912
913 @item -v
914 @itemx -version
915 Print the @command{as} version.
916
917 @item --version
918 Print the @command{as} version and exit.
919
920 @item -W
921 @itemx --no-warn
922 Suppress warning messages.
923
924 @item --fatal-warnings
925 Treat warnings as errors.
926
927 @item --warn
928 Don't suppress warning messages or treat them as errors.
929
930 @item -w
931 Ignored.
932
933 @item -x
934 Ignored.
935
936 @item -Z
937 Generate an object file even after errors.
938
939 @item -- | @var{files} @dots{}
940 Standard input, or source files to assemble.
941
942 @end table
943 @c man end
944
945 @ifset AARCH64
946
947 @ifclear man
948 @xref{AArch64 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
949 for the 64-bit mode of the ARM Architecture (AArch64).
950 @end ifclear
951
952 @ifset man
953 @c man begin OPTIONS
954 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
955 64-bit mode of the ARM Architecture (AArch64).
956 @c man end
957 @c man begin INCLUDE
958 @include c-aarch64.texi
959 @c ended inside the included file
960 @end ifset
961
962 @end ifset
963
964 @ifset ALPHA
965
966 @ifclear man
967 @xref{Alpha Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
968 for an Alpha processor.
969 @end ifclear
970
971 @ifset man
972 @c man begin OPTIONS
973 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an Alpha
974 processor.
975 @c man end
976 @c man begin INCLUDE
977 @include c-alpha.texi
978 @c ended inside the included file
979 @end ifset
980
981 @end ifset
982
983 @c man begin OPTIONS
984 @ifset ARC
985 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an ARC
986 processor.
987
988 @table @gcctabopt
989 @item -mcpu=@var{cpu}
990 This option selects the core processor variant.
991 @item -EB | -EL
992 Select either big-endian (-EB) or little-endian (-EL) output.
993 @item -mcode-density
994 Enable Code Density extension instructions.
995 @end table
996 @end ifset
997
998 @ifset ARM
999 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the ARM
1000 processor family.
1001
1002 @table @gcctabopt
1003 @item -mcpu=@var{processor}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]
1004 Specify which ARM processor variant is the target.
1005 @item -march=@var{architecture}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]
1006 Specify which ARM architecture variant is used by the target.
1007 @item -mfpu=@var{floating-point-format}
1008 Select which Floating Point architecture is the target.
1009 @item -mfloat-abi=@var{abi}
1010 Select which floating point ABI is in use.
1011 @item -mthumb
1012 Enable Thumb only instruction decoding.
1013 @item -mapcs-32 | -mapcs-26 | -mapcs-float | -mapcs-reentrant
1014 Select which procedure calling convention is in use.
1015 @item -EB | -EL
1016 Select either big-endian (-EB) or little-endian (-EL) output.
1017 @item -mthumb-interwork
1018 Specify that the code has been generated with interworking between Thumb and
1019 ARM code in mind.
1020 @item -mccs
1021 Turns on CodeComposer Studio assembly syntax compatibility mode.
1022 @item -k
1023 Specify that PIC code has been generated.
1024 @end table
1025 @end ifset
1026 @c man end
1027
1028 @ifset Blackfin
1029
1030 @ifclear man
1031 @xref{Blackfin Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
1032 configured for the Blackfin processor family.
1033 @end ifclear
1034
1035 @ifset man
1036 @c man begin OPTIONS
1037 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1038 the Blackfin processor family.
1039 @c man end
1040 @c man begin INCLUDE
1041 @include c-bfin.texi
1042 @c ended inside the included file
1043 @end ifset
1044
1045 @end ifset
1046
1047 @ifset BPF
1048
1049 @ifclear man
1050 @xref{BPF Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
1051 configured for the Linux kernel BPF processor family.
1052 @end ifclear
1053
1054 @ifset man
1055 @c man begin OPTIONS
1056 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1057 the Linux kernel BPF processor family.
1058 @c man end
1059 @c man begin INCLUDE
1060 @include c-bpf.texi
1061 @c ended inside the included file
1062 @end ifset
1063
1064 @end ifset
1065
1066 @c man begin OPTIONS
1067 @ifset CRIS
1068 See the info pages for documentation of the CRIS-specific options.
1069 @end ifset
1070
1071 @ifset CSKY
1072
1073 @ifclear man
1074 @xref{C-SKY Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
1075 configured for the C-SKY processor family.
1076 @end ifclear
1077
1078 @ifset man
1079 @c man begin OPTIONS
1080 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1081 the C-SKY processor family.
1082 @c man end
1083 @c man begin INCLUDE
1084 @include c-csky.texi
1085 @c ended inside the included file
1086 @end ifset
1087
1088 @end ifset
1089
1090 @ifset D10V
1091 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1092 a D10V processor.
1093 @table @gcctabopt
1094 @cindex D10V optimization
1095 @cindex optimization, D10V
1096 @item -O
1097 Optimize output by parallelizing instructions.
1098 @end table
1099 @end ifset
1100
1101 @ifset D30V
1102 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a D30V
1103 processor.
1104 @table @gcctabopt
1105 @cindex D30V optimization
1106 @cindex optimization, D30V
1107 @item -O
1108 Optimize output by parallelizing instructions.
1109
1110 @cindex D30V nops
1111 @item -n
1112 Warn when nops are generated.
1113
1114 @cindex D30V nops after 32-bit multiply
1115 @item -N
1116 Warn when a nop after a 32-bit multiply instruction is generated.
1117 @end table
1118 @end ifset
1119 @c man end
1120
1121 @ifset EPIPHANY
1122 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1123 Adapteva EPIPHANY series.
1124
1125 @ifclear man
1126 @xref{Epiphany Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
1127 configured for an Epiphany processor.
1128 @end ifclear
1129
1130 @ifset man
1131 @c man begin OPTIONS
1132 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1133 an Epiphany processor.
1134 @c man end
1135 @c man begin INCLUDE
1136 @include c-epiphany.texi
1137 @c ended inside the included file
1138 @end ifset
1139
1140 @end ifset
1141
1142 @ifset H8300
1143
1144 @ifclear man
1145 @xref{H8/300 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1146 for an H8/300 processor.
1147 @end ifclear
1148
1149 @ifset man
1150 @c man begin OPTIONS
1151 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an H8/300
1152 processor.
1153 @c man end
1154 @c man begin INCLUDE
1155 @include c-h8300.texi
1156 @c ended inside the included file
1157 @end ifset
1158
1159 @end ifset
1160
1161 @ifset I80386
1162
1163 @ifclear man
1164 @xref{i386-Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
1165 configured for an i386 processor.
1166 @end ifclear
1167
1168 @ifset man
1169 @c man begin OPTIONS
1170 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1171 an i386 processor.
1172 @c man end
1173 @c man begin INCLUDE
1174 @include c-i386.texi
1175 @c ended inside the included file
1176 @end ifset
1177
1178 @end ifset
1179
1180 @c man begin OPTIONS
1181 @ifset IP2K
1182 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1183 Ubicom IP2K series.
1184
1185 @table @gcctabopt
1186
1187 @item -mip2022ext
1188 Specifies that the extended IP2022 instructions are allowed.
1189
1190 @item -mip2022
1191 Restores the default behaviour, which restricts the permitted instructions to
1192 just the basic IP2022 ones.
1193
1194 @end table
1195 @end ifset
1196
1197 @ifset M32C
1198 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1199 Renesas M32C and M16C processors.
1200
1201 @table @gcctabopt
1202
1203 @item -m32c
1204 Assemble M32C instructions.
1205
1206 @item -m16c
1207 Assemble M16C instructions (the default).
1208
1209 @item -relax
1210 Enable support for link-time relaxations.
1211
1212 @item -h-tick-hex
1213 Support H'00 style hex constants in addition to 0x00 style.
1214
1215 @end table
1216 @end ifset
1217
1218 @ifset M32R
1219 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1220 Renesas M32R (formerly Mitsubishi M32R) series.
1221
1222 @table @gcctabopt
1223
1224 @item --m32rx
1225 Specify which processor in the M32R family is the target. The default
1226 is normally the M32R, but this option changes it to the M32RX.
1227
1228 @item --warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts or --Wp
1229 Produce warning messages when questionable parallel constructs are
1230 encountered.
1231
1232 @item --no-warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts or --Wnp
1233 Do not produce warning messages when questionable parallel constructs are
1234 encountered.
1235
1236 @end table
1237 @end ifset
1238
1239 @ifset M680X0
1240 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1241 Motorola 68000 series.
1242
1243 @table @gcctabopt
1244
1245 @item -l
1246 Shorten references to undefined symbols, to one word instead of two.
1247
1248 @item -m68000 | -m68008 | -m68010 | -m68020 | -m68030
1249 @itemx | -m68040 | -m68060 | -m68302 | -m68331 | -m68332
1250 @itemx | -m68333 | -m68340 | -mcpu32 | -m5200
1251 Specify what processor in the 68000 family is the target. The default
1252 is normally the 68020, but this can be changed at configuration time.
1253
1254 @item -m68881 | -m68882 | -mno-68881 | -mno-68882
1255 The target machine does (or does not) have a floating-point coprocessor.
1256 The default is to assume a coprocessor for 68020, 68030, and cpu32. Although
1257 the basic 68000 is not compatible with the 68881, a combination of the
1258 two can be specified, since it's possible to do emulation of the
1259 coprocessor instructions with the main processor.
1260
1261 @item -m68851 | -mno-68851
1262 The target machine does (or does not) have a memory-management
1263 unit coprocessor. The default is to assume an MMU for 68020 and up.
1264
1265 @end table
1266 @end ifset
1267
1268 @ifset NIOSII
1269
1270 @ifclear man
1271 @xref{Nios II Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1272 for an Altera Nios II processor.
1273 @end ifclear
1274
1275 @ifset man
1276 @c man begin OPTIONS
1277 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an
1278 Altera Nios II processor.
1279 @c man end
1280 @c man begin INCLUDE
1281 @include c-nios2.texi
1282 @c ended inside the included file
1283 @end ifset
1284 @end ifset
1285
1286 @ifset PDP11
1287
1288 For details about the PDP-11 machine dependent features options,
1289 see @ref{PDP-11-Options}.
1290
1291 @table @gcctabopt
1292 @item -mpic | -mno-pic
1293 Generate position-independent (or position-dependent) code. The
1294 default is @option{-mpic}.
1295
1296 @item -mall
1297 @itemx -mall-extensions
1298 Enable all instruction set extensions. This is the default.
1299
1300 @item -mno-extensions
1301 Disable all instruction set extensions.
1302
1303 @item -m@var{extension} | -mno-@var{extension}
1304 Enable (or disable) a particular instruction set extension.
1305
1306 @item -m@var{cpu}
1307 Enable the instruction set extensions supported by a particular CPU, and
1308 disable all other extensions.
1309
1310 @item -m@var{machine}
1311 Enable the instruction set extensions supported by a particular machine
1312 model, and disable all other extensions.
1313 @end table
1314
1315 @end ifset
1316
1317 @ifset PJ
1318 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1319 a picoJava processor.
1320
1321 @table @gcctabopt
1322
1323 @cindex PJ endianness
1324 @cindex endianness, PJ
1325 @cindex big endian output, PJ
1326 @item -mb
1327 Generate ``big endian'' format output.
1328
1329 @cindex little endian output, PJ
1330 @item -ml
1331 Generate ``little endian'' format output.
1332
1333 @end table
1334 @end ifset
1335
1336 @ifset PRU
1337
1338 @ifclear man
1339 @xref{PRU Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1340 for a PRU processor.
1341 @end ifclear
1342
1343 @ifset man
1344 @c man begin OPTIONS
1345 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1346 PRU processor.
1347 @c man end
1348 @c man begin INCLUDE
1349 @include c-pru.texi
1350 @c ended inside the included file
1351 @end ifset
1352 @end ifset
1353
1354 @ifset M68HC11
1355 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1356 Motorola 68HC11 or 68HC12 series.
1357
1358 @table @gcctabopt
1359
1360 @item -m68hc11 | -m68hc12 | -m68hcs12 | -mm9s12x | -mm9s12xg
1361 Specify what processor is the target. The default is
1362 defined by the configuration option when building the assembler.
1363
1364 @item --xgate-ramoffset
1365 Instruct the linker to offset RAM addresses from S12X address space into
1366 XGATE address space.
1367
1368 @item -mshort
1369 Specify to use the 16-bit integer ABI.
1370
1371 @item -mlong
1372 Specify to use the 32-bit integer ABI.
1373
1374 @item -mshort-double
1375 Specify to use the 32-bit double ABI.
1376
1377 @item -mlong-double
1378 Specify to use the 64-bit double ABI.
1379
1380 @item --force-long-branches
1381 Relative branches are turned into absolute ones. This concerns
1382 conditional branches, unconditional branches and branches to a
1383 sub routine.
1384
1385 @item -S | --short-branches
1386 Do not turn relative branches into absolute ones
1387 when the offset is out of range.
1388
1389 @item --strict-direct-mode
1390 Do not turn the direct addressing mode into extended addressing mode
1391 when the instruction does not support direct addressing mode.
1392
1393 @item --print-insn-syntax
1394 Print the syntax of instruction in case of error.
1395
1396 @item --print-opcodes
1397 Print the list of instructions with syntax and then exit.
1398
1399 @item --generate-example
1400 Print an example of instruction for each possible instruction and then exit.
1401 This option is only useful for testing @command{@value{AS}}.
1402
1403 @end table
1404 @end ifset
1405
1406 @ifset SPARC
1407 The following options are available when @command{@value{AS}} is configured
1408 for the SPARC architecture:
1409
1410 @table @gcctabopt
1411 @item -Av6 | -Av7 | -Av8 | -Asparclet | -Asparclite
1412 @itemx -Av8plus | -Av8plusa | -Av9 | -Av9a
1413 Explicitly select a variant of the SPARC architecture.
1414
1415 @samp{-Av8plus} and @samp{-Av8plusa} select a 32 bit environment.
1416 @samp{-Av9} and @samp{-Av9a} select a 64 bit environment.
1417
1418 @samp{-Av8plusa} and @samp{-Av9a} enable the SPARC V9 instruction set with
1419 UltraSPARC extensions.
1420
1421 @item -xarch=v8plus | -xarch=v8plusa
1422 For compatibility with the Solaris v9 assembler. These options are
1423 equivalent to -Av8plus and -Av8plusa, respectively.
1424
1425 @item -bump
1426 Warn when the assembler switches to another architecture.
1427 @end table
1428 @end ifset
1429
1430 @ifset TIC54X
1431 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the 'c54x
1432 architecture.
1433
1434 @table @gcctabopt
1435 @item -mfar-mode
1436 Enable extended addressing mode. All addresses and relocations will assume
1437 extended addressing (usually 23 bits).
1438 @item -mcpu=@var{CPU_VERSION}
1439 Sets the CPU version being compiled for.
1440 @item -merrors-to-file @var{FILENAME}
1441 Redirect error output to a file, for broken systems which don't support such
1442 behaviour in the shell.
1443 @end table
1444 @end ifset
1445
1446 @ifset MIPS
1447 @c man begin OPTIONS
1448 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1449 a MIPS processor.
1450
1451 @table @gcctabopt
1452 @item -G @var{num}
1453 This option sets the largest size of an object that can be referenced
1454 implicitly with the @code{gp} register. It is only accepted for targets that
1455 use ECOFF format, such as a DECstation running Ultrix. The default value is 8.
1456
1457 @cindex MIPS endianness
1458 @cindex endianness, MIPS
1459 @cindex big endian output, MIPS
1460 @item -EB
1461 Generate ``big endian'' format output.
1462
1463 @cindex little endian output, MIPS
1464 @item -EL
1465 Generate ``little endian'' format output.
1466
1467 @cindex MIPS ISA
1468 @item -mips1
1469 @itemx -mips2
1470 @itemx -mips3
1471 @itemx -mips4
1472 @itemx -mips5
1473 @itemx -mips32
1474 @itemx -mips32r2
1475 @itemx -mips32r3
1476 @itemx -mips32r5
1477 @itemx -mips32r6
1478 @itemx -mips64
1479 @itemx -mips64r2
1480 @itemx -mips64r3
1481 @itemx -mips64r5
1482 @itemx -mips64r6
1483 Generate code for a particular MIPS Instruction Set Architecture level.
1484 @samp{-mips1} is an alias for @samp{-march=r3000}, @samp{-mips2} is an
1485 alias for @samp{-march=r6000}, @samp{-mips3} is an alias for
1486 @samp{-march=r4000} and @samp{-mips4} is an alias for @samp{-march=r8000}.
1487 @samp{-mips5}, @samp{-mips32}, @samp{-mips32r2}, @samp{-mips32r3},
1488 @samp{-mips32r5}, @samp{-mips32r6}, @samp{-mips64}, @samp{-mips64r2},
1489 @samp{-mips64r3}, @samp{-mips64r5}, and @samp{-mips64r6} correspond to generic
1490 MIPS V, MIPS32, MIPS32 Release 2, MIPS32 Release 3, MIPS32 Release 5, MIPS32
1491 Release 6, MIPS64, MIPS64 Release 2, MIPS64 Release 3, MIPS64 Release 5, and
1492 MIPS64 Release 6 ISA processors, respectively.
1493
1494 @item -march=@var{cpu}
1495 Generate code for a particular MIPS CPU.
1496
1497 @item -mtune=@var{cpu}
1498 Schedule and tune for a particular MIPS CPU.
1499
1500 @item -mfix7000
1501 @itemx -mno-fix7000
1502 Cause nops to be inserted if the read of the destination register
1503 of an mfhi or mflo instruction occurs in the following two instructions.
1504
1505 @item -mfix-rm7000
1506 @itemx -mno-fix-rm7000
1507 Cause nops to be inserted if a dmult or dmultu instruction is
1508 followed by a load instruction.
1509
1510 @item -mfix-r5900
1511 @itemx -mno-fix-r5900
1512 Do not attempt to schedule the preceding instruction into the delay slot
1513 of a branch instruction placed at the end of a short loop of six
1514 instructions or fewer and always schedule a @code{nop} instruction there
1515 instead. The short loop bug under certain conditions causes loops to
1516 execute only once or twice, due to a hardware bug in the R5900 chip.
1517
1518 @item -mdebug
1519 @itemx -no-mdebug
1520 Cause stabs-style debugging output to go into an ECOFF-style .mdebug
1521 section instead of the standard ELF .stabs sections.
1522
1523 @item -mpdr
1524 @itemx -mno-pdr
1525 Control generation of @code{.pdr} sections.
1526
1527 @item -mgp32
1528 @itemx -mfp32
1529 The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but these
1530 flags force a certain group of registers to be treated as 32 bits wide at
1531 all times. @samp{-mgp32} controls the size of general-purpose registers
1532 and @samp{-mfp32} controls the size of floating-point registers.
1533
1534 @item -mgp64
1535 @itemx -mfp64
1536 The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but these
1537 flags force a certain group of registers to be treated as 64 bits wide at
1538 all times. @samp{-mgp64} controls the size of general-purpose registers
1539 and @samp{-mfp64} controls the size of floating-point registers.
1540
1541 @item -mfpxx
1542 The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but using
1543 this flag in combination with @samp{-mabi=32} enables an ABI variant
1544 which will operate correctly with floating-point registers which are
1545 32 or 64 bits wide.
1546
1547 @item -modd-spreg
1548 @itemx -mno-odd-spreg
1549 Enable use of floating-point operations on odd-numbered single-precision
1550 registers when supported by the ISA. @samp{-mfpxx} implies
1551 @samp{-mno-odd-spreg}, otherwise the default is @samp{-modd-spreg}.
1552
1553 @item -mips16
1554 @itemx -no-mips16
1555 Generate code for the MIPS 16 processor. This is equivalent to putting
1556 @code{.module mips16} at the start of the assembly file. @samp{-no-mips16}
1557 turns off this option.
1558
1559 @item -mmips16e2
1560 @itemx -mno-mips16e2
1561 Enable the use of MIPS16e2 instructions in MIPS16 mode. This is equivalent
1562 to putting @code{.module mips16e2} at the start of the assembly file.
1563 @samp{-mno-mips16e2} turns off this option.
1564
1565 @item -mmicromips
1566 @itemx -mno-micromips
1567 Generate code for the microMIPS processor. This is equivalent to putting
1568 @code{.module micromips} at the start of the assembly file.
1569 @samp{-mno-micromips} turns off this option. This is equivalent to putting
1570 @code{.module nomicromips} at the start of the assembly file.
1571
1572 @item -msmartmips
1573 @itemx -mno-smartmips
1574 Enables the SmartMIPS extension to the MIPS32 instruction set. This is
1575 equivalent to putting @code{.module smartmips} at the start of the assembly
1576 file. @samp{-mno-smartmips} turns off this option.
1577
1578 @item -mips3d
1579 @itemx -no-mips3d
1580 Generate code for the MIPS-3D Application Specific Extension.
1581 This tells the assembler to accept MIPS-3D instructions.
1582 @samp{-no-mips3d} turns off this option.
1583
1584 @item -mdmx
1585 @itemx -no-mdmx
1586 Generate code for the MDMX Application Specific Extension.
1587 This tells the assembler to accept MDMX instructions.
1588 @samp{-no-mdmx} turns off this option.
1589
1590 @item -mdsp
1591 @itemx -mno-dsp
1592 Generate code for the DSP Release 1 Application Specific Extension.
1593 This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 1 instructions.
1594 @samp{-mno-dsp} turns off this option.
1595
1596 @item -mdspr2
1597 @itemx -mno-dspr2
1598 Generate code for the DSP Release 2 Application Specific Extension.
1599 This option implies @samp{-mdsp}.
1600 This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 2 instructions.
1601 @samp{-mno-dspr2} turns off this option.
1602
1603 @item -mdspr3
1604 @itemx -mno-dspr3
1605 Generate code for the DSP Release 3 Application Specific Extension.
1606 This option implies @samp{-mdsp} and @samp{-mdspr2}.
1607 This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 3 instructions.
1608 @samp{-mno-dspr3} turns off this option.
1609
1610 @item -mmsa
1611 @itemx -mno-msa
1612 Generate code for the MIPS SIMD Architecture Extension.
1613 This tells the assembler to accept MSA instructions.
1614 @samp{-mno-msa} turns off this option.
1615
1616 @item -mxpa
1617 @itemx -mno-xpa
1618 Generate code for the MIPS eXtended Physical Address (XPA) Extension.
1619 This tells the assembler to accept XPA instructions.
1620 @samp{-mno-xpa} turns off this option.
1621
1622 @item -mmt
1623 @itemx -mno-mt
1624 Generate code for the MT Application Specific Extension.
1625 This tells the assembler to accept MT instructions.
1626 @samp{-mno-mt} turns off this option.
1627
1628 @item -mmcu
1629 @itemx -mno-mcu
1630 Generate code for the MCU Application Specific Extension.
1631 This tells the assembler to accept MCU instructions.
1632 @samp{-mno-mcu} turns off this option.
1633
1634 @item -mcrc
1635 @itemx -mno-crc
1636 Generate code for the MIPS cyclic redundancy check (CRC) Application
1637 Specific Extension. This tells the assembler to accept CRC instructions.
1638 @samp{-mno-crc} turns off this option.
1639
1640 @item -mginv
1641 @itemx -mno-ginv
1642 Generate code for the Global INValidate (GINV) Application Specific
1643 Extension. This tells the assembler to accept GINV instructions.
1644 @samp{-mno-ginv} turns off this option.
1645
1646 @item -mloongson-mmi
1647 @itemx -mno-loongson-mmi
1648 Generate code for the Loongson MultiMedia extensions Instructions (MMI)
1649 Application Specific Extension. This tells the assembler to accept MMI
1650 instructions.
1651 @samp{-mno-loongson-mmi} turns off this option.
1652
1653 @item -mloongson-cam
1654 @itemx -mno-loongson-cam
1655 Generate code for the Loongson Content Address Memory (CAM) instructions.
1656 This tells the assembler to accept Loongson CAM instructions.
1657 @samp{-mno-loongson-cam} turns off this option.
1658
1659 @item -mloongson-ext
1660 @itemx -mno-loongson-ext
1661 Generate code for the Loongson EXTensions (EXT) instructions.
1662 This tells the assembler to accept Loongson EXT instructions.
1663 @samp{-mno-loongson-ext} turns off this option.
1664
1665 @item -mloongson-ext2
1666 @itemx -mno-loongson-ext2
1667 Generate code for the Loongson EXTensions R2 (EXT2) instructions.
1668 This option implies @samp{-mloongson-ext}.
1669 This tells the assembler to accept Loongson EXT2 instructions.
1670 @samp{-mno-loongson-ext2} turns off this option.
1671
1672 @item -minsn32
1673 @itemx -mno-insn32
1674 Only use 32-bit instruction encodings when generating code for the
1675 microMIPS processor. This option inhibits the use of any 16-bit
1676 instructions. This is equivalent to putting @code{.set insn32} at
1677 the start of the assembly file. @samp{-mno-insn32} turns off this
1678 option. This is equivalent to putting @code{.set noinsn32} at the
1679 start of the assembly file. By default @samp{-mno-insn32} is
1680 selected, allowing all instructions to be used.
1681
1682 @item --construct-floats
1683 @itemx --no-construct-floats
1684 The @samp{--no-construct-floats} option disables the construction of
1685 double width floating point constants by loading the two halves of the
1686 value into the two single width floating point registers that make up
1687 the double width register. By default @samp{--construct-floats} is
1688 selected, allowing construction of these floating point constants.
1689
1690 @item --relax-branch
1691 @itemx --no-relax-branch
1692 The @samp{--relax-branch} option enables the relaxation of out-of-range
1693 branches. By default @samp{--no-relax-branch} is selected, causing any
1694 out-of-range branches to produce an error.
1695
1696 @item -mignore-branch-isa
1697 @itemx -mno-ignore-branch-isa
1698 Ignore branch checks for invalid transitions between ISA modes. The
1699 semantics of branches does not provide for an ISA mode switch, so in
1700 most cases the ISA mode a branch has been encoded for has to be the
1701 same as the ISA mode of the branch's target label. Therefore GAS has
1702 checks implemented that verify in branch assembly that the two ISA
1703 modes match. @samp{-mignore-branch-isa} disables these checks. By
1704 default @samp{-mno-ignore-branch-isa} is selected, causing any invalid
1705 branch requiring a transition between ISA modes to produce an error.
1706
1707 @item -mnan=@var{encoding}
1708 Select between the IEEE 754-2008 (@option{-mnan=2008}) or the legacy
1709 (@option{-mnan=legacy}) NaN encoding format. The latter is the default.
1710
1711 @cindex emulation
1712 @item --emulation=@var{name}
1713 This option was formerly used to switch between ELF and ECOFF output
1714 on targets like IRIX 5 that supported both. MIPS ECOFF support was
1715 removed in GAS 2.24, so the option now serves little purpose.
1716 It is retained for backwards compatibility.
1717
1718 The available configuration names are: @samp{mipself}, @samp{mipslelf} and
1719 @samp{mipsbelf}. Choosing @samp{mipself} now has no effect, since the output
1720 is always ELF. @samp{mipslelf} and @samp{mipsbelf} select little- and
1721 big-endian output respectively, but @samp{-EL} and @samp{-EB} are now the
1722 preferred options instead.
1723
1724 @item -nocpp
1725 @command{@value{AS}} ignores this option. It is accepted for compatibility with
1726 the native tools.
1727
1728 @item --trap
1729 @itemx --no-trap
1730 @itemx --break
1731 @itemx --no-break
1732 Control how to deal with multiplication overflow and division by zero.
1733 @samp{--trap} or @samp{--no-break} (which are synonyms) take a trap exception
1734 (and only work for Instruction Set Architecture level 2 and higher);
1735 @samp{--break} or @samp{--no-trap} (also synonyms, and the default) take a
1736 break exception.
1737
1738 @item -n
1739 When this option is used, @command{@value{AS}} will issue a warning every
1740 time it generates a nop instruction from a macro.
1741 @end table
1742 @c man end
1743 @end ifset
1744
1745 @ifset MCORE
1746 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1747 an MCore processor.
1748
1749 @table @gcctabopt
1750 @item -jsri2bsr
1751 @itemx -nojsri2bsr
1752 Enable or disable the JSRI to BSR transformation. By default this is enabled.
1753 The command-line option @samp{-nojsri2bsr} can be used to disable it.
1754
1755 @item -sifilter
1756 @itemx -nosifilter
1757 Enable or disable the silicon filter behaviour. By default this is disabled.
1758 The default can be overridden by the @samp{-sifilter} command-line option.
1759
1760 @item -relax
1761 Alter jump instructions for long displacements.
1762
1763 @item -mcpu=[210|340]
1764 Select the cpu type on the target hardware. This controls which instructions
1765 can be assembled.
1766
1767 @item -EB
1768 Assemble for a big endian target.
1769
1770 @item -EL
1771 Assemble for a little endian target.
1772
1773 @end table
1774 @end ifset
1775 @c man end
1776
1777 @ifset LOONGARCH
1778
1779 @ifclear man
1780 @xref{LoongArch-Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1781 for a LoongArch processor.
1782 @end ifclear
1783
1784 @ifset man
1785 @c man begin OPTIONS
1786 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1787 LoongArch processor.
1788 @c man end
1789 @c man begin INCLUDE
1790 @include c-loongarch.texi
1791 @c ended inside the included file
1792 @end ifset
1793
1794 @end ifset
1795
1796 @ifset METAG
1797
1798 @ifclear man
1799 @xref{Meta Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1800 for a Meta processor.
1801 @end ifclear
1802
1803 @ifset man
1804 @c man begin OPTIONS
1805 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1806 Meta processor.
1807 @c man end
1808 @c man begin INCLUDE
1809 @include c-metag.texi
1810 @c ended inside the included file
1811 @end ifset
1812
1813 @end ifset
1814
1815 @c man begin OPTIONS
1816 @ifset MMIX
1817 See the info pages for documentation of the MMIX-specific options.
1818 @end ifset
1819
1820 @ifset NDS32
1821
1822 @ifclear man
1823 @xref{NDS32 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1824 for a NDS32 processor.
1825 @end ifclear
1826 @c ended inside the included file
1827 @end ifset
1828
1829 @ifset man
1830 @c man begin OPTIONS
1831 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1832 NDS32 processor.
1833 @c man end
1834 @c man begin INCLUDE
1835 @include c-nds32.texi
1836 @c ended inside the included file
1837 @end ifset
1838
1839 @c man end
1840 @ifset PPC
1841
1842 @ifclear man
1843 @xref{PowerPC-Opts}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1844 for a PowerPC processor.
1845 @end ifclear
1846
1847 @ifset man
1848 @c man begin OPTIONS
1849 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1850 PowerPC processor.
1851 @c man end
1852 @c man begin INCLUDE
1853 @include c-ppc.texi
1854 @c ended inside the included file
1855 @end ifset
1856
1857 @end ifset
1858
1859 @ifset RISCV
1860
1861 @ifclear man
1862 @xref{RISC-V-Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1863 for a RISC-V processor.
1864 @end ifclear
1865
1866 @ifset man
1867 @c man begin OPTIONS
1868 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1869 RISC-V processor.
1870 @c man end
1871 @c man begin INCLUDE
1872 @include c-riscv.texi
1873 @c ended inside the included file
1874 @end ifset
1875
1876 @end ifset
1877
1878 @c man begin OPTIONS
1879 @ifset RX
1880 See the info pages for documentation of the RX-specific options.
1881 @end ifset
1882
1883 @ifset S390
1884 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the s390
1885 processor family.
1886
1887 @table @gcctabopt
1888 @item -m31
1889 @itemx -m64
1890 Select the word size, either 31/32 bits or 64 bits.
1891 @item -mesa
1892 @item -mzarch
1893 Select the architecture mode, either the Enterprise System
1894 Architecture (esa) or the z/Architecture mode (zarch).
1895 @item -march=@var{processor}
1896 Specify which s390 processor variant is the target, @samp{g5} (or
1897 @samp{arch3}), @samp{g6}, @samp{z900} (or @samp{arch5}), @samp{z990} (or
1898 @samp{arch6}), @samp{z9-109}, @samp{z9-ec} (or @samp{arch7}), @samp{z10} (or
1899 @samp{arch8}), @samp{z196} (or @samp{arch9}), @samp{zEC12} (or @samp{arch10}),
1900 @samp{z13} (or @samp{arch11}), @samp{z14} (or @samp{arch12}), @samp{z15}
1901 (or @samp{arch13}), or @samp{z16} (or @samp{arch14}).
1902 @item -mregnames
1903 @itemx -mno-regnames
1904 Allow or disallow symbolic names for registers.
1905 @item -mwarn-areg-zero
1906 Warn whenever the operand for a base or index register has been specified
1907 but evaluates to zero.
1908 @end table
1909 @end ifset
1910 @c man end
1911
1912 @ifset TIC6X
1913
1914 @ifclear man
1915 @xref{TIC6X Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1916 for a TMS320C6000 processor.
1917 @end ifclear
1918
1919 @ifset man
1920 @c man begin OPTIONS
1921 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1922 TMS320C6000 processor.
1923 @c man end
1924 @c man begin INCLUDE
1925 @include c-tic6x.texi
1926 @c ended inside the included file
1927 @end ifset
1928
1929 @end ifset
1930
1931 @ifset TILEGX
1932
1933 @ifclear man
1934 @xref{TILE-Gx Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1935 for a TILE-Gx processor.
1936 @end ifclear
1937
1938 @ifset man
1939 @c man begin OPTIONS
1940 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a TILE-Gx
1941 processor.
1942 @c man end
1943 @c man begin INCLUDE
1944 @include c-tilegx.texi
1945 @c ended inside the included file
1946 @end ifset
1947
1948 @end ifset
1949
1950 @ifset VISIUM
1951
1952 @ifclear man
1953 @xref{Visium Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1954 for a Visium processor.
1955 @end ifclear
1956
1957 @ifset man
1958 @c man begin OPTIONS
1959 The following option is available when @value{AS} is configured for a Visium
1960 processor.
1961 @c man end
1962 @c man begin INCLUDE
1963 @include c-visium.texi
1964 @c ended inside the included file
1965 @end ifset
1966
1967 @end ifset
1968
1969 @ifset XTENSA
1970
1971 @ifclear man
1972 @xref{Xtensa Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1973 for an Xtensa processor.
1974 @end ifclear
1975
1976 @ifset man
1977 @c man begin OPTIONS
1978 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an
1979 Xtensa processor.
1980 @c man end
1981 @c man begin INCLUDE
1982 @include c-xtensa.texi
1983 @c ended inside the included file
1984 @end ifset
1985
1986 @end ifset
1987
1988 @ifset Z80
1989
1990 @ifclear man
1991 @xref{Z80 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1992 for an Z80 processor.
1993 @end ifclear
1994
1995 @ifset man
1996 @c man begin OPTIONS
1997 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an
1998 Z80 processor.
1999 @c man end
2000 @c man begin INCLUDE
2001 @include c-z80.texi
2002 @c ended inside the included file
2003 @end ifset
2004
2005 @end ifset
2006
2007 @menu
2008 * Manual:: Structure of this Manual
2009 * GNU Assembler:: The GNU Assembler
2010 * Object Formats:: Object File Formats
2011 * Command Line:: Command Line
2012 * Input Files:: Input Files
2013 * Object:: Output (Object) File
2014 * Errors:: Error and Warning Messages
2015 @end menu
2016
2017 @node Manual
2018 @section Structure of this Manual
2019
2020 @cindex manual, structure and purpose
2021 This manual is intended to describe what you need to know to use
2022 @sc{gnu} @command{@value{AS}}. We cover the syntax expected in source files, including
2023 notation for symbols, constants, and expressions; the directives that
2024 @command{@value{AS}} understands; and of course how to invoke @command{@value{AS}}.
2025
2026 @ifclear GENERIC
2027 We also cover special features in the @value{TARGET}
2028 configuration of @command{@value{AS}}, including assembler directives.
2029 @end ifclear
2030 @ifset GENERIC
2031 This manual also describes some of the machine-dependent features of
2032 various flavors of the assembler.
2033 @end ifset
2034
2035 @cindex machine instructions (not covered)
2036 On the other hand, this manual is @emph{not} intended as an introduction
2037 to programming in assembly language---let alone programming in general!
2038 In a similar vein, we make no attempt to introduce the machine
2039 architecture; we do @emph{not} describe the instruction set, standard
2040 mnemonics, registers or addressing modes that are standard to a
2041 particular architecture.
2042 @ifset GENERIC
2043 You may want to consult the manufacturer's
2044 machine architecture manual for this information.
2045 @end ifset
2046 @ifclear GENERIC
2047 @ifset H8/300
2048 For information on the H8/300 machine instruction set, see @cite{H8/300
2049 Series Programming Manual}. For the H8/300H, see @cite{H8/300H Series
2050 Programming Manual} (Renesas).
2051 @end ifset
2052 @ifset SH
2053 For information on the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) / SuperH SH machine instruction set,
2054 see @cite{SH-Microcomputer User's Manual} (Renesas) or
2055 @cite{SH-4 32-bit CPU Core Architecture} (SuperH) and
2056 @cite{SuperH (SH) 64-Bit RISC Series} (SuperH).
2057 @end ifset
2058 @ifset Z8000
2059 For information on the Z8000 machine instruction set, see @cite{Z8000 CPU Technical Manual}
2060 @end ifset
2061 @end ifclear
2062
2063 @c I think this is premature---doc@cygnus.com, 17jan1991
2064 @ignore
2065 Throughout this manual, we assume that you are running @dfn{GNU},
2066 the portable operating system from the @dfn{Free Software
2067 Foundation, Inc.}. This restricts our attention to certain kinds of
2068 computer (in particular, the kinds of computers that @sc{gnu} can run on);
2069 once this assumption is granted examples and definitions need less
2070 qualification.
2071
2072 @command{@value{AS}} is part of a team of programs that turn a high-level
2073 human-readable series of instructions into a low-level
2074 computer-readable series of instructions. Different versions of
2075 @command{@value{AS}} are used for different kinds of computer.
2076 @end ignore
2077
2078 @c There used to be a section "Terminology" here, which defined
2079 @c "contents", "byte", "word", and "long". Defining "word" to any
2080 @c particular size is confusing when the .word directive may generate 16
2081 @c bits on one machine and 32 bits on another; in general, for the user
2082 @c version of this manual, none of these terms seem essential to define.
2083 @c They were used very little even in the former draft of the manual;
2084 @c this draft makes an effort to avoid them (except in names of
2085 @c directives).
2086
2087 @node GNU Assembler
2088 @section The GNU Assembler
2089
2090 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
2091
2092 @sc{gnu} @command{as} is really a family of assemblers.
2093 @ifclear GENERIC
2094 This manual describes @command{@value{AS}}, a member of that family which is
2095 configured for the @value{TARGET} architectures.
2096 @end ifclear
2097 If you use (or have used) the @sc{gnu} assembler on one architecture, you
2098 should find a fairly similar environment when you use it on another
2099 architecture. Each version has much in common with the others,
2100 including object file formats, most assembler directives (often called
2101 @dfn{pseudo-ops}) and assembler syntax.@refill
2102
2103 @cindex purpose of @sc{gnu} assembler
2104 @command{@value{AS}} is primarily intended to assemble the output of the
2105 @sc{gnu} C compiler @code{@value{GCC}} for use by the linker
2106 @code{@value{LD}}. Nevertheless, we've tried to make @command{@value{AS}}
2107 assemble correctly everything that other assemblers for the same
2108 machine would assemble.
2109 @ifset VAX
2110 Any exceptions are documented explicitly (@pxref{Machine Dependencies}).
2111 @end ifset
2112 @ifset M680X0
2113 @c This remark should appear in generic version of manual; assumption
2114 @c here is that generic version sets M680x0.
2115 This doesn't mean @command{@value{AS}} always uses the same syntax as another
2116 assembler for the same architecture; for example, we know of several
2117 incompatible versions of 680x0 assembly language syntax.
2118 @end ifset
2119
2120 @c man end
2121
2122 Unlike older assemblers, @command{@value{AS}} is designed to assemble a source
2123 program in one pass of the source file. This has a subtle impact on the
2124 @kbd{.org} directive (@pxref{Org,,@code{.org}}).
2125
2126 @node Object Formats
2127 @section Object File Formats
2128
2129 @cindex object file format
2130 The @sc{gnu} assembler can be configured to produce several alternative
2131 object file formats. For the most part, this does not affect how you
2132 write assembly language programs; but directives for debugging symbols
2133 are typically different in different file formats. @xref{Symbol
2134 Attributes,,Symbol Attributes}.
2135 @ifclear GENERIC
2136 @ifclear MULTI-OBJ
2137 For the @value{TARGET} target, @command{@value{AS}} is configured to produce
2138 @value{OBJ-NAME} format object files.
2139 @end ifclear
2140 @c The following should exhaust all configs that set MULTI-OBJ, ideally
2141 @ifset HPPA
2142 On the @value{TARGET}, @command{@value{AS}} can be configured to produce either
2143 SOM or ELF format object files.
2144 @end ifset
2145 @end ifclear
2146
2147 @node Command Line
2148 @section Command Line
2149
2150 @cindex command line conventions
2151
2152 After the program name @command{@value{AS}}, the command line may contain
2153 options and file names. Options may appear in any order, and may be
2154 before, after, or between file names. The order of file names is
2155 significant.
2156
2157 @cindex standard input, as input file
2158 @kindex --
2159 @file{--} (two hyphens) by itself names the standard input file
2160 explicitly, as one of the files for @command{@value{AS}} to assemble.
2161
2162 @cindex options, command line
2163 Except for @samp{--} any command-line argument that begins with a
2164 hyphen (@samp{-}) is an option. Each option changes the behavior of
2165 @command{@value{AS}}. No option changes the way another option works. An
2166 option is a @samp{-} followed by one or more letters; the case of
2167 the letter is important. All options are optional.
2168
2169 Some options expect exactly one file name to follow them. The file
2170 name may either immediately follow the option's letter (compatible
2171 with older assemblers) or it may be the next command argument (@sc{gnu}
2172 standard). These two command lines are equivalent:
2173
2174 @smallexample
2175 @value{AS} -o my-object-file.o mumble.s
2176 @value{AS} -omy-object-file.o mumble.s
2177 @end smallexample
2178
2179 @node Input Files
2180 @section Input Files
2181
2182 @cindex input
2183 @cindex source program
2184 @cindex files, input
2185 We use the phrase @dfn{source program}, abbreviated @dfn{source}, to
2186 describe the program input to one run of @command{@value{AS}}. The program may
2187 be in one or more files; how the source is partitioned into files
2188 doesn't change the meaning of the source.
2189
2190 @c I added "con" prefix to "catenation" just to prove I can overcome my
2191 @c APL training... doc@cygnus.com
2192 The source program is a concatenation of the text in all the files, in the
2193 order specified.
2194
2195 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
2196 Each time you run @command{@value{AS}} it assembles exactly one source
2197 program. The source program is made up of one or more files.
2198 (The standard input is also a file.)
2199
2200 You give @command{@value{AS}} a command line that has zero or more input file
2201 names. The input files are read (from left file name to right). A
2202 command-line argument (in any position) that has no special meaning
2203 is taken to be an input file name.
2204
2205 If you give @command{@value{AS}} no file names it attempts to read one input file
2206 from the @command{@value{AS}} standard input, which is normally your terminal. You
2207 may have to type @key{ctl-D} to tell @command{@value{AS}} there is no more program
2208 to assemble.
2209
2210 Use @samp{--} if you need to explicitly name the standard input file
2211 in your command line.
2212
2213 If the source is empty, @command{@value{AS}} produces a small, empty object
2214 file.
2215
2216 @c man end
2217
2218 @subheading Filenames and Line-numbers
2219
2220 @cindex input file linenumbers
2221 @cindex line numbers, in input files
2222 There are two ways of locating a line in the input file (or files) and
2223 either may be used in reporting error messages. One way refers to a line
2224 number in a physical file; the other refers to a line number in a
2225 ``logical'' file. @xref{Errors, ,Error and Warning Messages}.
2226
2227 @dfn{Physical files} are those files named in the command line given
2228 to @command{@value{AS}}.
2229
2230 @dfn{Logical files} are simply names declared explicitly by assembler
2231 directives; they bear no relation to physical files. Logical file names help
2232 error messages reflect the original source file, when @command{@value{AS}} source
2233 is itself synthesized from other files. @command{@value{AS}} understands the
2234 @samp{#} directives emitted by the @code{@value{GCC}} preprocessor. See also
2235 @ref{File,,@code{.file}}.
2236
2237 @node Object
2238 @section Output (Object) File
2239
2240 @cindex object file
2241 @cindex output file
2242 @kindex a.out
2243 @kindex .o
2244 Every time you run @command{@value{AS}} it produces an output file, which is
2245 your assembly language program translated into numbers. This file
2246 is the object file. Its default name is @code{a.out}.
2247 You can give it another name by using the @option{-o} option. Conventionally,
2248 object file names end with @file{.o}. The default name is used for historical
2249 reasons: older assemblers were capable of assembling self-contained programs
2250 directly into a runnable program. (For some formats, this isn't currently
2251 possible, but it can be done for the @code{a.out} format.)
2252
2253 @cindex linker
2254 @kindex ld
2255 The object file is meant for input to the linker @code{@value{LD}}. It contains
2256 assembled program code, information to help @code{@value{LD}} integrate
2257 the assembled program into a runnable file, and (optionally) symbolic
2258 information for the debugger.
2259
2260 @c link above to some info file(s) like the description of a.out.
2261 @c don't forget to describe @sc{gnu} info as well as Unix lossage.
2262
2263 @node Errors
2264 @section Error and Warning Messages
2265
2266 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
2267
2268 @cindex error messages
2269 @cindex warning messages
2270 @cindex messages from assembler
2271 @command{@value{AS}} may write warnings and error messages to the standard error
2272 file (usually your terminal). This should not happen when a compiler
2273 runs @command{@value{AS}} automatically. Warnings report an assumption made so
2274 that @command{@value{AS}} could keep assembling a flawed program; errors report a
2275 grave problem that stops the assembly.
2276
2277 @c man end
2278
2279 @cindex format of warning messages
2280 Warning messages have the format
2281
2282 @smallexample
2283 file_name:@b{NNN}:Warning Message Text
2284 @end smallexample
2285
2286 @noindent
2287 @cindex file names and line numbers, in warnings/errors
2288 (where @b{NNN} is a line number). If both a logical file name
2289 (@pxref{File,,@code{.file}}) and a logical line number
2290 @ifset GENERIC
2291 (@pxref{Line,,@code{.line}})
2292 @end ifset
2293 have been given then they will be used, otherwise the file name and line number
2294 in the current assembler source file will be used. The message text is
2295 intended to be self explanatory (in the grand Unix tradition).
2296
2297 Note the file name must be set via the logical version of the @code{.file}
2298 directive, not the DWARF2 version of the @code{.file} directive. For example:
2299
2300 @smallexample
2301 .file 2 "bar.c"
2302 error_assembler_source
2303 .file "foo.c"
2304 .line 30
2305 error_c_source
2306 @end smallexample
2307
2308 produces this output:
2309
2310 @smallexample
2311 Assembler messages:
2312 asm.s:2: Error: no such instruction: `error_assembler_source'
2313 foo.c:31: Error: no such instruction: `error_c_source'
2314 @end smallexample
2315
2316 @cindex format of error messages
2317 Error messages have the format
2318
2319 @smallexample
2320 file_name:@b{NNN}:FATAL:Error Message Text
2321 @end smallexample
2322
2323 The file name and line number are derived as for warning
2324 messages. The actual message text may be rather less explanatory
2325 because many of them aren't supposed to happen.
2326
2327 @node Invoking
2328 @chapter Command-Line Options
2329
2330 @cindex options, all versions of assembler
2331 This chapter describes command-line options available in @emph{all}
2332 versions of the @sc{gnu} assembler; see @ref{Machine Dependencies},
2333 for options specific
2334 @ifclear GENERIC
2335 to the @value{TARGET} target.
2336 @end ifclear
2337 @ifset GENERIC
2338 to particular machine architectures.
2339 @end ifset
2340
2341 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
2342
2343 If you are invoking @command{@value{AS}} via the @sc{gnu} C compiler,
2344 you can use the @samp{-Wa} option to pass arguments through to the assembler.
2345 The assembler arguments must be separated from each other (and the @samp{-Wa})
2346 by commas. For example:
2347
2348 @smallexample
2349 gcc -c -g -O -Wa,-alh,-L file.c
2350 @end smallexample
2351
2352 @noindent
2353 This passes two options to the assembler: @samp{-alh} (emit a listing to
2354 standard output with high-level and assembly source) and @samp{-L} (retain
2355 local symbols in the symbol table).
2356
2357 Usually you do not need to use this @samp{-Wa} mechanism, since many compiler
2358 command-line options are automatically passed to the assembler by the compiler.
2359 (You can call the @sc{gnu} compiler driver with the @samp{-v} option to see
2360 precisely what options it passes to each compilation pass, including the
2361 assembler.)
2362
2363 @c man end
2364
2365 @menu
2366 * a:: -a[cdghlns] enable listings
2367 * alternate:: --alternate enable alternate macro syntax
2368 * D:: -D for compatibility
2369 * f:: -f to work faster
2370 * I:: -I for .include search path
2371 @ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2372 * K:: -K for compatibility
2373 @end ifclear
2374 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2375 * K:: -K for difference tables
2376 @end ifset
2377
2378 * L:: -L to retain local symbols
2379 * listing:: --listing-XXX to configure listing output
2380 * M:: -M or --mri to assemble in MRI compatibility mode
2381 * MD:: --MD for dependency tracking
2382 * no-pad-sections:: --no-pad-sections to stop section padding
2383 * o:: -o to name the object file
2384 * R:: -R to join data and text sections
2385 * statistics:: --statistics to see statistics about assembly
2386 * traditional-format:: --traditional-format for compatible output
2387 * v:: -v to announce version
2388 * W:: -W, --no-warn, --warn, --fatal-warnings to control warnings
2389 * Z:: -Z to make object file even after errors
2390 @end menu
2391
2392 @node a
2393 @section Enable Listings: @option{-a[cdghlns]}
2394
2395 @kindex -a
2396 @kindex -ac
2397 @kindex -ad
2398 @kindex -ag
2399 @kindex -ah
2400 @kindex -al
2401 @kindex -an
2402 @kindex -as
2403 @cindex listings, enabling
2404 @cindex assembly listings, enabling
2405
2406 These options enable listing output from the assembler. By itself,
2407 @samp{-a} requests high-level, assembly, and symbols listing.
2408 You can use other letters to select specific options for the list:
2409 @samp{-ah} requests a high-level language listing,
2410 @samp{-al} requests an output-program assembly listing, and
2411 @samp{-as} requests a symbol table listing.
2412 High-level listings require that a compiler debugging option like
2413 @samp{-g} be used, and that assembly listings (@samp{-al}) be requested
2414 also.
2415
2416 Use the @samp{-ag} option to print a first section with general assembly
2417 information, like @value{AS} version, switches passed, or time stamp.
2418
2419 Use the @samp{-ac} option to omit false conditionals from a listing. Any lines
2420 which are not assembled because of a false @code{.if} (or @code{.ifdef}, or any
2421 other conditional), or a true @code{.if} followed by an @code{.else}, will be
2422 omitted from the listing.
2423
2424 Use the @samp{-ad} option to omit debugging directives from the
2425 listing.
2426
2427 Once you have specified one of these options, you can further control
2428 listing output and its appearance using the directives @code{.list},
2429 @code{.nolist}, @code{.psize}, @code{.eject}, @code{.title}, and
2430 @code{.sbttl}.
2431 The @samp{-an} option turns off all forms processing.
2432 If you do not request listing output with one of the @samp{-a} options, the
2433 listing-control directives have no effect.
2434
2435 The letters after @samp{-a} may be combined into one option,
2436 @emph{e.g.}, @samp{-aln}.
2437
2438 Note if the assembler source is coming from the standard input (e.g.,
2439 because it
2440 is being created by @code{@value{GCC}} and the @samp{-pipe} command-line switch
2441 is being used) then the listing will not contain any comments or preprocessor
2442 directives. This is because the listing code buffers input source lines from
2443 stdin only after they have been preprocessed by the assembler. This reduces
2444 memory usage and makes the code more efficient.
2445
2446 @node alternate
2447 @section @option{--alternate}
2448
2449 @kindex --alternate
2450 Begin in alternate macro mode, see @ref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
2451
2452 @node D
2453 @section @option{-D}
2454
2455 @kindex -D
2456 This option has no effect whatsoever, but it is accepted to make it more
2457 likely that scripts written for other assemblers also work with
2458 @command{@value{AS}}.
2459
2460 @node f
2461 @section Work Faster: @option{-f}
2462
2463 @kindex -f
2464 @cindex trusted compiler
2465 @cindex faster processing (@option{-f})
2466 @samp{-f} should only be used when assembling programs written by a
2467 (trusted) compiler. @samp{-f} stops the assembler from doing whitespace
2468 and comment preprocessing on
2469 the input file(s) before assembling them. @xref{Preprocessing,
2470 ,Preprocessing}.
2471
2472 @quotation
2473 @emph{Warning:} if you use @samp{-f} when the files actually need to be
2474 preprocessed (if they contain comments, for example), @command{@value{AS}} does
2475 not work correctly.
2476 @end quotation
2477
2478 @node I
2479 @section @code{.include} Search Path: @option{-I} @var{path}
2480
2481 @kindex -I @var{path}
2482 @cindex paths for @code{.include}
2483 @cindex search path for @code{.include}
2484 @cindex @code{include} directive search path
2485 Use this option to add a @var{path} to the list of directories
2486 @command{@value{AS}} searches for files specified in @code{.include}
2487 directives (@pxref{Include,,@code{.include}}). You may use @option{-I} as
2488 many times as necessary to include a variety of paths. The current
2489 working directory is always searched first; after that, @command{@value{AS}}
2490 searches any @samp{-I} directories in the same order as they were
2491 specified (left to right) on the command line.
2492
2493 @node K
2494 @section Difference Tables: @option{-K}
2495
2496 @kindex -K
2497 @ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2498 On the @value{TARGET} family, this option is allowed, but has no effect. It is
2499 permitted for compatibility with the @sc{gnu} assembler on other platforms,
2500 where it can be used to warn when the assembler alters the machine code
2501 generated for @samp{.word} directives in difference tables. The @value{TARGET}
2502 family does not have the addressing limitations that sometimes lead to this
2503 alteration on other platforms.
2504 @end ifclear
2505
2506 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2507 @cindex difference tables, warning
2508 @cindex warning for altered difference tables
2509 @command{@value{AS}} sometimes alters the code emitted for directives of the
2510 form @samp{.word @var{sym1}-@var{sym2}}. @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
2511 You can use the @samp{-K} option if you want a warning issued when this
2512 is done.
2513 @end ifset
2514
2515 @node L
2516 @section Include Local Symbols: @option{-L}
2517
2518 @kindex -L
2519 @cindex local symbols, retaining in output
2520 Symbols beginning with system-specific local label prefixes, typically
2521 @samp{.L} for ELF systems or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems, are
2522 called @dfn{local symbols}. @xref{Symbol Names}. Normally you do not see
2523 such symbols when debugging, because they are intended for the use of
2524 programs (like compilers) that compose assembler programs, not for your
2525 notice. Normally both @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} discard
2526 such symbols, so you do not normally debug with them.
2527
2528 This option tells @command{@value{AS}} to retain those local symbols
2529 in the object file. Usually if you do this you also tell the linker
2530 @code{@value{LD}} to preserve those symbols.
2531
2532 @node listing
2533 @section Configuring listing output: @option{--listing}
2534
2535 The listing feature of the assembler can be enabled via the command-line switch
2536 @samp{-a} (@pxref{a}). This feature combines the input source file(s) with a
2537 hex dump of the corresponding locations in the output object file, and displays
2538 them as a listing file. The format of this listing can be controlled by
2539 directives inside the assembler source (i.e., @code{.list} (@pxref{List}),
2540 @code{.title} (@pxref{Title}), @code{.sbttl} (@pxref{Sbttl}),
2541 @code{.psize} (@pxref{Psize}), and
2542 @code{.eject} (@pxref{Eject}) and also by the following switches:
2543
2544 @table @gcctabopt
2545 @item --listing-lhs-width=@samp{number}
2546 @kindex --listing-lhs-width
2547 @cindex Width of first line disassembly output
2548 Sets the maximum width, in words, of the first line of the hex byte dump. This
2549 dump appears on the left hand side of the listing output.
2550
2551 @item --listing-lhs-width2=@samp{number}
2552 @kindex --listing-lhs-width2
2553 @cindex Width of continuation lines of disassembly output
2554 Sets the maximum width, in words, of any further lines of the hex byte dump for
2555 a given input source line. If this value is not specified, it defaults to being
2556 the same as the value specified for @samp{--listing-lhs-width}. If neither
2557 switch is used the default is to one.
2558
2559 @item --listing-rhs-width=@samp{number}
2560 @kindex --listing-rhs-width
2561 @cindex Width of source line output
2562 Sets the maximum width, in characters, of the source line that is displayed
2563 alongside the hex dump. The default value for this parameter is 100. The
2564 source line is displayed on the right hand side of the listing output.
2565
2566 @item --listing-cont-lines=@samp{number}
2567 @kindex --listing-cont-lines
2568 @cindex Maximum number of continuation lines
2569 Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex dump that will be
2570 displayed for a given single line of source input. The default value is 4.
2571 @end table
2572
2573 @node M
2574 @section Assemble in MRI Compatibility Mode: @option{-M}
2575
2576 @kindex -M
2577 @cindex MRI compatibility mode
2578 The @option{-M} or @option{--mri} option selects MRI compatibility mode. This
2579 changes the syntax and pseudo-op handling of @command{@value{AS}} to make it
2580 compatible with the @code{ASM68K} assembler from Microtec Research.
2581 The exact nature of the
2582 MRI syntax will not be documented here; see the MRI manuals for more
2583 information. Note in particular that the handling of macros and macro
2584 arguments is somewhat different. The purpose of this option is to permit
2585 assembling existing MRI assembler code using @command{@value{AS}}.
2586
2587 The MRI compatibility is not complete. Certain operations of the MRI assembler
2588 depend upon its object file format, and can not be supported using other object
2589 file formats. Supporting these would require enhancing each object file format
2590 individually. These are:
2591
2592 @itemize @bullet
2593 @item global symbols in common section
2594
2595 The m68k MRI assembler supports common sections which are merged by the linker.
2596 Other object file formats do not support this. @command{@value{AS}} handles
2597 common sections by treating them as a single common symbol. It permits local
2598 symbols to be defined within a common section, but it can not support global
2599 symbols, since it has no way to describe them.
2600
2601 @item complex relocations
2602
2603 The MRI assemblers support relocations against a negated section address, and
2604 relocations which combine the start addresses of two or more sections. These
2605 are not support by other object file formats.
2606
2607 @item @code{END} pseudo-op specifying start address
2608
2609 The MRI @code{END} pseudo-op permits the specification of a start address.
2610 This is not supported by other object file formats. The start address may
2611 instead be specified using the @option{-e} option to the linker, or in a linker
2612 script.
2613
2614 @item @code{IDNT}, @code{.ident} and @code{NAME} pseudo-ops
2615
2616 The MRI @code{IDNT}, @code{.ident} and @code{NAME} pseudo-ops assign a module
2617 name to the output file. This is not supported by other object file formats.
2618
2619 @item @code{ORG} pseudo-op
2620
2621 The m68k MRI @code{ORG} pseudo-op begins an absolute section at a given
2622 address. This differs from the usual @command{@value{AS}} @code{.org} pseudo-op,
2623 which changes the location within the current section. Absolute sections are
2624 not supported by other object file formats. The address of a section may be
2625 assigned within a linker script.
2626 @end itemize
2627
2628 There are some other features of the MRI assembler which are not supported by
2629 @command{@value{AS}}, typically either because they are difficult or because they
2630 seem of little consequence. Some of these may be supported in future releases.
2631
2632 @itemize @bullet
2633
2634 @item EBCDIC strings
2635
2636 EBCDIC strings are not supported.
2637
2638 @item packed binary coded decimal
2639
2640 Packed binary coded decimal is not supported. This means that the @code{DC.P}
2641 and @code{DCB.P} pseudo-ops are not supported.
2642
2643 @item @code{FEQU} pseudo-op
2644
2645 The m68k @code{FEQU} pseudo-op is not supported.
2646
2647 @item @code{NOOBJ} pseudo-op
2648
2649 The m68k @code{NOOBJ} pseudo-op is not supported.
2650
2651 @item @code{OPT} branch control options
2652
2653 The m68k @code{OPT} branch control options---@code{B}, @code{BRS}, @code{BRB},
2654 @code{BRL}, and @code{BRW}---are ignored. @command{@value{AS}} automatically
2655 relaxes all branches, whether forward or backward, to an appropriate size, so
2656 these options serve no purpose.
2657
2658 @item @code{OPT} list control options
2659
2660 The following m68k @code{OPT} list control options are ignored: @code{C},
2661 @code{CEX}, @code{CL}, @code{CRE}, @code{E}, @code{G}, @code{I}, @code{M},
2662 @code{MEX}, @code{MC}, @code{MD}, @code{X}.
2663
2664 @item other @code{OPT} options
2665
2666 The following m68k @code{OPT} options are ignored: @code{NEST}, @code{O},
2667 @code{OLD}, @code{OP}, @code{P}, @code{PCO}, @code{PCR}, @code{PCS}, @code{R}.
2668
2669 @item @code{OPT} @code{D} option is default
2670
2671 The m68k @code{OPT} @code{D} option is the default, unlike the MRI assembler.
2672 @code{OPT NOD} may be used to turn it off.
2673
2674 @item @code{XREF} pseudo-op.
2675
2676 The m68k @code{XREF} pseudo-op is ignored.
2677
2678 @end itemize
2679
2680 @node MD
2681 @section Dependency Tracking: @option{--MD}
2682
2683 @kindex --MD
2684 @cindex dependency tracking
2685 @cindex make rules
2686
2687 @command{@value{AS}} can generate a dependency file for the file it creates. This
2688 file consists of a single rule suitable for @code{make} describing the
2689 dependencies of the main source file.
2690
2691 The rule is written to the file named in its argument.
2692
2693 This feature is used in the automatic updating of makefiles.
2694
2695 @node no-pad-sections
2696 @section Output Section Padding
2697 @kindex --no-pad-sections
2698 @cindex output section padding
2699 Normally the assembler will pad the end of each output section up to its
2700 alignment boundary. But this can waste space, which can be significant on
2701 memory constrained targets. So the @option{--no-pad-sections} option will
2702 disable this behaviour.
2703
2704 @node o
2705 @section Name the Object File: @option{-o}
2706
2707 @kindex -o
2708 @cindex naming object file
2709 @cindex object file name
2710 There is always one object file output when you run @command{@value{AS}}. By
2711 default it has the name @file{a.out}.
2712 You use this option (which takes exactly one filename) to give the
2713 object file a different name.
2714
2715 Whatever the object file is called, @command{@value{AS}} overwrites any
2716 existing file of the same name.
2717
2718 @node R
2719 @section Join Data and Text Sections: @option{-R}
2720
2721 @kindex -R
2722 @cindex data and text sections, joining
2723 @cindex text and data sections, joining
2724 @cindex joining text and data sections
2725 @cindex merging text and data sections
2726 @option{-R} tells @command{@value{AS}} to write the object file as if all
2727 data-section data lives in the text section. This is only done at
2728 the very last moment: your binary data are the same, but data
2729 section parts are relocated differently. The data section part of
2730 your object file is zero bytes long because all its bytes are
2731 appended to the text section. (@xref{Sections,,Sections and Relocation}.)
2732
2733 When you specify @option{-R} it would be possible to generate shorter
2734 address displacements (because we do not have to cross between text and
2735 data section). We refrain from doing this simply for compatibility with
2736 older versions of @command{@value{AS}}. In future, @option{-R} may work this way.
2737
2738 @ifset COFF-ELF
2739 When @command{@value{AS}} is configured for COFF or ELF output,
2740 this option is only useful if you use sections named @samp{.text} and
2741 @samp{.data}.
2742 @end ifset
2743
2744 @ifset HPPA
2745 @option{-R} is not supported for any of the HPPA targets. Using
2746 @option{-R} generates a warning from @command{@value{AS}}.
2747 @end ifset
2748
2749 @node statistics
2750 @section Display Assembly Statistics: @option{--statistics}
2751
2752 @kindex --statistics
2753 @cindex statistics, about assembly
2754 @cindex time, total for assembly
2755 @cindex space used, maximum for assembly
2756 Use @samp{--statistics} to display two statistics about the resources used by
2757 @command{@value{AS}}: the maximum amount of space allocated during the assembly
2758 (in bytes), and the total execution time taken for the assembly (in @sc{cpu}
2759 seconds).
2760
2761 @node traditional-format
2762 @section Compatible Output: @option{--traditional-format}
2763
2764 @kindex --traditional-format
2765 For some targets, the output of @command{@value{AS}} is different in some ways
2766 from the output of some existing assembler. This switch requests
2767 @command{@value{AS}} to use the traditional format instead.
2768
2769 For example, it disables the exception frame optimizations which
2770 @command{@value{AS}} normally does by default on @code{@value{GCC}} output.
2771
2772 @node v
2773 @section Announce Version: @option{-v}
2774
2775 @kindex -v
2776 @kindex -version
2777 @cindex assembler version
2778 @cindex version of assembler
2779 You can find out what version of as is running by including the
2780 option @samp{-v} (which you can also spell as @samp{-version}) on the
2781 command line.
2782
2783 @node W
2784 @section Control Warnings: @option{-W}, @option{--warn}, @option{--no-warn}, @option{--fatal-warnings}
2785
2786 @command{@value{AS}} should never give a warning or error message when
2787 assembling compiler output. But programs written by people often
2788 cause @command{@value{AS}} to give a warning that a particular assumption was
2789 made. All such warnings are directed to the standard error file.
2790
2791 @kindex -W
2792 @kindex --no-warn
2793 @cindex suppressing warnings
2794 @cindex warnings, suppressing
2795 If you use the @option{-W} and @option{--no-warn} options, no warnings are issued.
2796 This only affects the warning messages: it does not change any particular of
2797 how @command{@value{AS}} assembles your file. Errors, which stop the assembly,
2798 are still reported.
2799
2800 @kindex --fatal-warnings
2801 @cindex errors, caused by warnings
2802 @cindex warnings, causing error
2803 If you use the @option{--fatal-warnings} option, @command{@value{AS}} considers
2804 files that generate warnings to be in error.
2805
2806 @kindex --warn
2807 @cindex warnings, switching on
2808 You can switch these options off again by specifying @option{--warn}, which
2809 causes warnings to be output as usual.
2810
2811 @node Z
2812 @section Generate Object File in Spite of Errors: @option{-Z}
2813 @cindex object file, after errors
2814 @cindex errors, continuing after
2815 After an error message, @command{@value{AS}} normally produces no output. If for
2816 some reason you are interested in object file output even after
2817 @command{@value{AS}} gives an error message on your program, use the @samp{-Z}
2818 option. If there are any errors, @command{@value{AS}} continues anyways, and
2819 writes an object file after a final warning message of the form @samp{@var{n}
2820 errors, @var{m} warnings, generating bad object file.}
2821
2822 @node Syntax
2823 @chapter Syntax
2824
2825 @cindex machine-independent syntax
2826 @cindex syntax, machine-independent
2827 This chapter describes the machine-independent syntax allowed in a
2828 source file. @command{@value{AS}} syntax is similar to what many other
2829 assemblers use; it is inspired by the BSD 4.2
2830 @ifclear VAX
2831 assembler.
2832 @end ifclear
2833 @ifset VAX
2834 assembler, except that @command{@value{AS}} does not assemble Vax bit-fields.
2835 @end ifset
2836
2837 @menu
2838 * Preprocessing:: Preprocessing
2839 * Whitespace:: Whitespace
2840 * Comments:: Comments
2841 * Symbol Intro:: Symbols
2842 * Statements:: Statements
2843 * Constants:: Constants
2844 @end menu
2845
2846 @node Preprocessing
2847 @section Preprocessing
2848
2849 @cindex preprocessing
2850 The @command{@value{AS}} internal preprocessor:
2851 @itemize @bullet
2852 @cindex whitespace, removed by preprocessor
2853 @item
2854 adjusts and removes extra whitespace. It leaves one space or tab before
2855 the keywords on a line, and turns any other whitespace on the line into
2856 a single space.
2857
2858 @cindex comments, removed by preprocessor
2859 @item
2860 removes all comments, replacing them with a single space, or an
2861 appropriate number of newlines.
2862
2863 @cindex constants, converted by preprocessor
2864 @item
2865 converts character constants into the appropriate numeric values.
2866 @end itemize
2867
2868 It does not do macro processing, include file handling, or
2869 anything else you may get from your C compiler's preprocessor. You can
2870 do include file processing with the @code{.include} directive
2871 (@pxref{Include,,@code{.include}}). You can use the @sc{gnu} C compiler driver
2872 to get other ``CPP'' style preprocessing by giving the input file a
2873 @samp{.S} suffix. @url{https://gcc.gnu.org/onlinedocs/gcc/Overall-Options.html#Overall-Options,
2874 See the 'Options Controlling the Kind of Output' section of the GCC manual for
2875 more details}
2876
2877 Excess whitespace, comments, and character constants
2878 cannot be used in the portions of the input text that are not
2879 preprocessed.
2880
2881 @cindex turning preprocessing on and off
2882 @cindex preprocessing, turning on and off
2883 @kindex #NO_APP
2884 @kindex #APP
2885 If the first line of an input file is @code{#NO_APP} or if you use the
2886 @samp{-f} option, whitespace and comments are not removed from the input file.
2887 Within an input file, you can ask for whitespace and comment removal in
2888 specific portions of the by putting a line that says @code{#APP} before the
2889 text that may contain whitespace or comments, and putting a line that says
2890 @code{#NO_APP} after this text. This feature is mainly intend to support
2891 @code{asm} statements in compilers whose output is otherwise free of comments
2892 and whitespace.
2893
2894 @node Whitespace
2895 @section Whitespace
2896
2897 @cindex whitespace
2898 @dfn{Whitespace} is one or more blanks or tabs, in any order.
2899 Whitespace is used to separate symbols, and to make programs neater for
2900 people to read. Unless within character constants
2901 (@pxref{Characters,,Character Constants}), any whitespace means the same
2902 as exactly one space.
2903
2904 @node Comments
2905 @section Comments
2906
2907 @cindex comments
2908 There are two ways of rendering comments to @command{@value{AS}}. In both
2909 cases the comment is equivalent to one space.
2910
2911 Anything from @samp{/*} through the next @samp{*/} is a comment.
2912 This means you may not nest these comments.
2913
2914 @smallexample
2915 /*
2916 The only way to include a newline ('\n') in a comment
2917 is to use this sort of comment.
2918 */
2919
2920 /* This sort of comment does not nest. */
2921 @end smallexample
2922
2923 @cindex line comment character
2924 Anything from a @dfn{line comment} character up to the next newline is
2925 considered a comment and is ignored. The line comment character is target
2926 specific, and some targets multiple comment characters. Some targets also have
2927 line comment characters that only work if they are the first character on a
2928 line. Some targets use a sequence of two characters to introduce a line
2929 comment. Some targets can also change their line comment characters depending
2930 upon command-line options that have been used. For more details see the
2931 @emph{Syntax} section in the documentation for individual targets.
2932
2933 If the line comment character is the hash sign (@samp{#}) then it still has the
2934 special ability to enable and disable preprocessing (@pxref{Preprocessing}) and
2935 to specify logical line numbers:
2936
2937 @kindex #
2938 @cindex lines starting with @code{#}
2939 @cindex logical line numbers
2940 To be compatible with past assemblers, lines that begin with @samp{#} have a
2941 special interpretation. Following the @samp{#} should be an absolute
2942 expression (@pxref{Expressions}): the logical line number of the @emph{next}
2943 line. Then a string (@pxref{Strings, ,Strings}) is allowed: if present it is a
2944 new logical file name. The rest of the line, if any, should be whitespace.
2945
2946 If the first non-whitespace characters on the line are not numeric,
2947 the line is ignored. (Just like a comment.)
2948
2949 @smallexample
2950 # This is an ordinary comment.
2951 # 42-6 "new_file_name" # New logical file name
2952 # This is logical line # 36.
2953 @end smallexample
2954 This feature is deprecated, and may disappear from future versions
2955 of @command{@value{AS}}.
2956
2957 @node Symbol Intro
2958 @section Symbols
2959
2960 @cindex characters used in symbols
2961 @ifclear SPECIAL-SYMS
2962 A @dfn{symbol} is one or more characters chosen from the set of all
2963 letters (both upper and lower case), digits and the three characters
2964 @samp{_.$}.
2965 @end ifclear
2966 @ifset SPECIAL-SYMS
2967 @ifclear GENERIC
2968 @ifset H8
2969 A @dfn{symbol} is one or more characters chosen from the set of all
2970 letters (both upper and lower case), digits and the three characters
2971 @samp{._$}. (Save that, on the H8/300 only, you may not use @samp{$} in
2972 symbol names.)
2973 @end ifset
2974 @end ifclear
2975 @end ifset
2976 @ifset GENERIC
2977 On most machines, you can also use @code{$} in symbol names; exceptions
2978 are noted in @ref{Machine Dependencies}.
2979 @end ifset
2980 No symbol may begin with a digit. Case is significant.
2981 There is no length limit; all characters are significant. Multibyte characters
2982 are supported, but note that the setting of the
2983 @option{--multibyte-handling} option might prevent their use. Symbols
2984 are delimited by characters not in that set, or by the beginning of a file
2985 (since the source program must end with a newline, the end of a file is not a
2986 possible symbol delimiter). @xref{Symbols}.
2987
2988 Symbol names may also be enclosed in double quote @code{"} characters. In such
2989 cases any characters are allowed, except for the NUL character. If a double
2990 quote character is to be included in the symbol name it must be preceded by a
2991 backslash @code{\} character.
2992 @cindex length of symbols
2993
2994 @node Statements
2995 @section Statements
2996
2997 @cindex statements, structure of
2998 @cindex line separator character
2999 @cindex statement separator character
3000
3001 A @dfn{statement} ends at a newline character (@samp{\n}) or a
3002 @dfn{line separator character}. The line separator character is target
3003 specific and described in the @emph{Syntax} section of each
3004 target's documentation. Not all targets support a line separator character.
3005 The newline or line separator character is considered to be part of the
3006 preceding statement. Newlines and separators within character constants are an
3007 exception: they do not end statements.
3008
3009 @cindex newline, required at file end
3010 @cindex EOF, newline must precede
3011 It is an error to end any statement with end-of-file: the last
3012 character of any input file should be a newline.@refill
3013
3014 An empty statement is allowed, and may include whitespace. It is ignored.
3015
3016 @cindex instructions and directives
3017 @cindex directives and instructions
3018 @c "key symbol" is not used elsewhere in the document; seems pedantic to
3019 @c @defn{} it in that case, as was done previously... doc@cygnus.com,
3020 @c 13feb91.
3021 A statement begins with zero or more labels, optionally followed by a
3022 key symbol which determines what kind of statement it is. The key
3023 symbol determines the syntax of the rest of the statement. If the
3024 symbol begins with a dot @samp{.} then the statement is an assembler
3025 directive: typically valid for any computer. If the symbol begins with
3026 a letter the statement is an assembly language @dfn{instruction}: it
3027 assembles into a machine language instruction.
3028 @ifset GENERIC
3029 Different versions of @command{@value{AS}} for different computers
3030 recognize different instructions. In fact, the same symbol may
3031 represent a different instruction in a different computer's assembly
3032 language.@refill
3033 @end ifset
3034
3035 @cindex @code{:} (label)
3036 @cindex label (@code{:})
3037 A label is a symbol immediately followed by a colon (@code{:}).
3038 Whitespace before a label or after a colon is permitted, but you may not
3039 have whitespace between a label's symbol and its colon. @xref{Labels}.
3040
3041 @ifset HPPA
3042 For HPPA targets, labels need not be immediately followed by a colon, but
3043 the definition of a label must begin in column zero. This also implies that
3044 only one label may be defined on each line.
3045 @end ifset
3046
3047 @smallexample
3048 label: .directive followed by something
3049 another_label: # This is an empty statement.
3050 instruction operand_1, operand_2, @dots{}
3051 @end smallexample
3052
3053 @node Constants
3054 @section Constants
3055
3056 @cindex constants
3057 A constant is a number, written so that its value is known by
3058 inspection, without knowing any context. Like this:
3059 @smallexample
3060 @group
3061 .byte 74, 0112, 092, 0x4A, 0X4a, 'J, '\J # All the same value.
3062 .ascii "Ring the bell\7" # A string constant.
3063 .octa 0x123456789abcdef0123456789ABCDEF0 # A bignum.
3064 .float 0f-314159265358979323846264338327\
3065 95028841971.693993751E-40 # - pi, a flonum.
3066 @end group
3067 @end smallexample
3068
3069 @menu
3070 * Characters:: Character Constants
3071 * Numbers:: Number Constants
3072 @end menu
3073
3074 @node Characters
3075 @subsection Character Constants
3076
3077 @cindex character constants
3078 @cindex constants, character
3079 There are two kinds of character constants. A @dfn{character} stands
3080 for one character in one byte and its value may be used in
3081 numeric expressions. String constants (properly called string
3082 @emph{literals}) are potentially many bytes and their values may not be
3083 used in arithmetic expressions.
3084
3085 @menu
3086 * Strings:: Strings
3087 * Chars:: Characters
3088 @end menu
3089
3090 @node Strings
3091 @subsubsection Strings
3092
3093 @cindex string constants
3094 @cindex constants, string
3095 A @dfn{string} is written between double-quotes. It may contain
3096 double-quotes or null characters. The way to get special characters
3097 into a string is to @dfn{escape} these characters: precede them with
3098 a backslash @samp{\} character. For example @samp{\\} represents
3099 one backslash: the first @code{\} is an escape which tells
3100 @command{@value{AS}} to interpret the second character literally as a backslash
3101 (which prevents @command{@value{AS}} from recognizing the second @code{\} as an
3102 escape character). The complete list of escapes follows.
3103
3104 @cindex escape codes, character
3105 @cindex character escape codes
3106 @c NOTE: Cindex entries must not start with a backlash character.
3107 @c NOTE: This confuses the pdf2texi script when it is creating the
3108 @c NOTE: index based upon the first character and so it generates:
3109 @c NOTE: \initial {\\}
3110 @c NOTE: which then results in the error message:
3111 @c NOTE: Argument of \\ has an extra }.
3112 @c NOTE: So in the index entries below a space character has been
3113 @c NOTE: prepended to avoid this problem.
3114 @table @kbd
3115 @c @item \a
3116 @c Mnemonic for ACKnowledge; for ASCII this is octal code 007.
3117 @c
3118 @cindex @code{ \b} (backspace character)
3119 @cindex backspace (@code{\b})
3120 @item \b
3121 Mnemonic for backspace; for ASCII this is octal code 010.
3122
3123 @c @item \e
3124 @c Mnemonic for EOText; for ASCII this is octal code 004.
3125 @c
3126 @cindex @code{ \f} (formfeed character)
3127 @cindex formfeed (@code{\f})
3128 @item backslash-f
3129 Mnemonic for FormFeed; for ASCII this is octal code 014.
3130
3131 @cindex @code{ \n} (newline character)
3132 @cindex newline (@code{\n})
3133 @item \n
3134 Mnemonic for newline; for ASCII this is octal code 012.
3135
3136 @c @item \p
3137 @c Mnemonic for prefix; for ASCII this is octal code 033, usually known as @code{escape}.
3138 @c
3139 @cindex @code{ \r} (carriage return character)
3140 @cindex carriage return (@code{backslash-r})
3141 @item \r
3142 Mnemonic for carriage-Return; for ASCII this is octal code 015.
3143
3144 @c @item \s
3145 @c Mnemonic for space; for ASCII this is octal code 040. Included for compliance with
3146 @c other assemblers.
3147 @c
3148 @cindex @code{ \t} (tab)
3149 @cindex tab (@code{\t})
3150 @item \t
3151 Mnemonic for horizontal Tab; for ASCII this is octal code 011.
3152
3153 @c @item \v
3154 @c Mnemonic for Vertical tab; for ASCII this is octal code 013.
3155 @c @item \x @var{digit} @var{digit} @var{digit}
3156 @c A hexadecimal character code. The numeric code is 3 hexadecimal digits.
3157 @c
3158 @cindex @code{ \@var{ddd}} (octal character code)
3159 @cindex octal character code (@code{\@var{ddd}})
3160 @item \ @var{digit} @var{digit} @var{digit}
3161 An octal character code. The numeric code is 3 octal digits.
3162 For compatibility with other Unix systems, 8 and 9 are accepted as digits:
3163 for example, @code{\008} has the value 010, and @code{\009} the value 011.
3164
3165 @cindex @code{ \@var{xd...}} (hex character code)
3166 @cindex hex character code (@code{\@var{xd...}})
3167 @item \@code{x} @var{hex-digits...}
3168 A hex character code. All trailing hex digits are combined. Either upper or
3169 lower case @code{x} works.
3170
3171 @cindex @code{ \\} (@samp{\} character)
3172 @cindex backslash (@code{\\})
3173 @item \\
3174 Represents one @samp{\} character.
3175
3176 @c @item \'
3177 @c Represents one @samp{'} (accent acute) character.
3178 @c This is needed in single character literals
3179 @c (@xref{Characters,,Character Constants}.) to represent
3180 @c a @samp{'}.
3181 @c
3182 @cindex @code{ \"} (doublequote character)
3183 @cindex doublequote (@code{\"})
3184 @item \"
3185 Represents one @samp{"} character. Needed in strings to represent
3186 this character, because an unescaped @samp{"} would end the string.
3187
3188 @item \ @var{anything-else}
3189 Any other character when escaped by @kbd{\} gives a warning, but
3190 assembles as if the @samp{\} was not present. The idea is that if
3191 you used an escape sequence you clearly didn't want the literal
3192 interpretation of the following character. However @command{@value{AS}} has no
3193 other interpretation, so @command{@value{AS}} knows it is giving you the wrong
3194 code and warns you of the fact.
3195 @end table
3196
3197 Which characters are escapable, and what those escapes represent,
3198 varies widely among assemblers. The current set is what we think
3199 the BSD 4.2 assembler recognizes, and is a subset of what most C
3200 compilers recognize. If you are in doubt, do not use an escape
3201 sequence.
3202
3203 @node Chars
3204 @subsubsection Characters
3205
3206 @cindex single character constant
3207 @cindex character, single
3208 @cindex constant, single character
3209 A single character may be written as a single quote immediately followed by
3210 that character. Some backslash escapes apply to characters, @code{\b},
3211 @code{\f}, @code{\n}, @code{\r}, @code{\t}, and @code{\"} with the same meaning
3212 as for strings, plus @code{\'} for a single quote. So if you want to write the
3213 character backslash, you must write @kbd{'\\} where the first @code{\} escapes
3214 the second @code{\}. As you can see, the quote is an acute accent, not a grave
3215 accent. A newline
3216 @ifclear GENERIC
3217 @ifclear abnormal-separator
3218 (or semicolon @samp{;})
3219 @end ifclear
3220 @ifset abnormal-separator
3221 @ifset H8
3222 (or dollar sign @samp{$}, for the H8/300; or semicolon @samp{;} for the
3223 Renesas SH)
3224 @end ifset
3225 @end ifset
3226 @end ifclear
3227 immediately following an acute accent is taken as a literal character
3228 and does not count as the end of a statement. The value of a character
3229 constant in a numeric expression is the machine's byte-wide code for
3230 that character. @command{@value{AS}} assumes your character code is ASCII:
3231 @kbd{'A} means 65, @kbd{'B} means 66, and so on. @refill
3232
3233 @node Numbers
3234 @subsection Number Constants
3235
3236 @cindex constants, number
3237 @cindex number constants
3238 @command{@value{AS}} distinguishes three kinds of numbers according to how they
3239 are stored in the target machine. @emph{Integers} are numbers that
3240 would fit into an @code{int} in the C language. @emph{Bignums} are
3241 integers, but they are stored in more than 32 bits. @emph{Flonums}
3242 are floating point numbers, described below.
3243
3244 @menu
3245 * Integers:: Integers
3246 * Bignums:: Bignums
3247 * Flonums:: Flonums
3248 @ifclear GENERIC
3249 @end ifclear
3250 @end menu
3251
3252 @node Integers
3253 @subsubsection Integers
3254 @cindex integers
3255 @cindex constants, integer
3256
3257 @cindex binary integers
3258 @cindex integers, binary
3259 A binary integer is @samp{0b} or @samp{0B} followed by zero or more of
3260 the binary digits @samp{01}.
3261
3262 @cindex octal integers
3263 @cindex integers, octal
3264 An octal integer is @samp{0} followed by zero or more of the octal
3265 digits (@samp{01234567}).
3266
3267 @cindex decimal integers
3268 @cindex integers, decimal
3269 A decimal integer starts with a non-zero digit followed by zero or
3270 more digits (@samp{0123456789}).
3271
3272 @cindex hexadecimal integers
3273 @cindex integers, hexadecimal
3274 A hexadecimal integer is @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} followed by one or
3275 more hexadecimal digits chosen from @samp{0123456789abcdefABCDEF}.
3276
3277 Integers have the usual values. To denote a negative integer, use
3278 the prefix operator @samp{-} discussed under expressions
3279 (@pxref{Prefix Ops,,Prefix Operators}).
3280
3281 @node Bignums
3282 @subsubsection Bignums
3283
3284 @cindex bignums
3285 @cindex constants, bignum
3286 A @dfn{bignum} has the same syntax and semantics as an integer
3287 except that the number (or its negative) takes more than 32 bits to
3288 represent in binary. The distinction is made because in some places
3289 integers are permitted while bignums are not.
3290
3291 @node Flonums
3292 @subsubsection Flonums
3293 @cindex flonums
3294 @cindex floating point numbers
3295 @cindex constants, floating point
3296
3297 @cindex precision, floating point
3298 A @dfn{flonum} represents a floating point number. The translation is
3299 indirect: a decimal floating point number from the text is converted by
3300 @command{@value{AS}} to a generic binary floating point number of more than
3301 sufficient precision. This generic floating point number is converted
3302 to a particular computer's floating point format (or formats) by a
3303 portion of @command{@value{AS}} specialized to that computer.
3304
3305 A flonum is written by writing (in order)
3306 @itemize @bullet
3307 @item
3308 The digit @samp{0}.
3309 @ifset HPPA
3310 (@samp{0} is optional on the HPPA.)
3311 @end ifset
3312
3313 @item
3314 A letter, to tell @command{@value{AS}} the rest of the number is a flonum.
3315 @ifset GENERIC
3316 @kbd{e} is recommended. Case is not important.
3317 @ignore
3318 @c FIXME: verify if flonum syntax really this vague for most cases
3319 (Any otherwise illegal letter works here, but that might be changed. Vax BSD
3320 4.2 assembler seems to allow any of @samp{defghDEFGH}.)
3321 @end ignore
3322
3323 On the H8/300 and Renesas / SuperH SH architectures, the letter must be
3324 one of the letters @samp{DFPRSX} (in upper or lower case).
3325
3326 On the ARC, the letter must be one of the letters @samp{DFRS}
3327 (in upper or lower case).
3328
3329 On the HPPA architecture, the letter must be @samp{E} (upper case only).
3330 @end ifset
3331 @ifclear GENERIC
3332 @ifset ARC
3333 One of the letters @samp{DFRS} (in upper or lower case).
3334 @end ifset
3335 @ifset H8
3336 One of the letters @samp{DFPRSX} (in upper or lower case).
3337 @end ifset
3338 @ifset HPPA
3339 The letter @samp{E} (upper case only).
3340 @end ifset
3341 @end ifclear
3342
3343 @item
3344 An optional sign: either @samp{+} or @samp{-}.
3345
3346 @item
3347 An optional @dfn{integer part}: zero or more decimal digits.
3348
3349 @item
3350 An optional @dfn{fractional part}: @samp{.} followed by zero
3351 or more decimal digits.
3352
3353 @item
3354 An optional exponent, consisting of:
3355
3356 @itemize @bullet
3357 @item
3358 An @samp{E} or @samp{e}.
3359 @c I can't find a config where "EXP_CHARS" is other than 'eE', but in
3360 @c principle this can perfectly well be different on different targets.
3361 @item
3362 Optional sign: either @samp{+} or @samp{-}.
3363 @item
3364 One or more decimal digits.
3365 @end itemize
3366
3367 @end itemize
3368
3369 At least one of the integer part or the fractional part must be
3370 present. The floating point number has the usual base-10 value.
3371
3372 @command{@value{AS}} does all processing using integers. Flonums are computed
3373 independently of any floating point hardware in the computer running
3374 @command{@value{AS}}.
3375
3376 @node Sections
3377 @chapter Sections and Relocation
3378 @cindex sections
3379 @cindex relocation
3380
3381 @menu
3382 * Secs Background:: Background
3383 * Ld Sections:: Linker Sections
3384 * As Sections:: Assembler Internal Sections
3385 * Sub-Sections:: Sub-Sections
3386 * bss:: bss Section
3387 @end menu
3388
3389 @node Secs Background
3390 @section Background
3391
3392 Roughly, a section is a range of addresses, with no gaps; all data
3393 ``in'' those addresses is treated the same for some particular purpose.
3394 For example there may be a ``read only'' section.
3395
3396 @cindex linker, and assembler
3397 @cindex assembler, and linker
3398 The linker @code{@value{LD}} reads many object files (partial programs) and
3399 combines their contents to form a runnable program. When @command{@value{AS}}
3400 emits an object file, the partial program is assumed to start at address 0.
3401 @code{@value{LD}} assigns the final addresses for the partial program, so that
3402 different partial programs do not overlap. This is actually an
3403 oversimplification, but it suffices to explain how @command{@value{AS}} uses
3404 sections.
3405
3406 @code{@value{LD}} moves blocks of bytes of your program to their run-time
3407 addresses. These blocks slide to their run-time addresses as rigid
3408 units; their length does not change and neither does the order of bytes
3409 within them. Such a rigid unit is called a @emph{section}. Assigning
3410 run-time addresses to sections is called @dfn{relocation}. It includes
3411 the task of adjusting mentions of object-file addresses so they refer to
3412 the proper run-time addresses.
3413 @ifset H8
3414 For the H8/300, and for the Renesas / SuperH SH,
3415 @command{@value{AS}} pads sections if needed to
3416 ensure they end on a word (sixteen bit) boundary.
3417 @end ifset
3418
3419 @cindex standard assembler sections
3420 An object file written by @command{@value{AS}} has at least three sections, any
3421 of which may be empty. These are named @dfn{text}, @dfn{data} and
3422 @dfn{bss} sections.
3423
3424 @ifset COFF-ELF
3425 @ifset GENERIC
3426 When it generates COFF or ELF output,
3427 @end ifset
3428 @command{@value{AS}} can also generate whatever other named sections you specify
3429 using the @samp{.section} directive (@pxref{Section,,@code{.section}}).
3430 If you do not use any directives that place output in the @samp{.text}
3431 or @samp{.data} sections, these sections still exist, but are empty.
3432 @end ifset
3433
3434 @ifset HPPA
3435 @ifset GENERIC
3436 When @command{@value{AS}} generates SOM or ELF output for the HPPA,
3437 @end ifset
3438 @command{@value{AS}} can also generate whatever other named sections you
3439 specify using the @samp{.space} and @samp{.subspace} directives. See
3440 @cite{HP9000 Series 800 Assembly Language Reference Manual}
3441 (HP 92432-90001) for details on the @samp{.space} and @samp{.subspace}
3442 assembler directives.
3443
3444 @ifset SOM
3445 Additionally, @command{@value{AS}} uses different names for the standard
3446 text, data, and bss sections when generating SOM output. Program text
3447 is placed into the @samp{$CODE$} section, data into @samp{$DATA$}, and
3448 BSS into @samp{$BSS$}.
3449 @end ifset
3450 @end ifset
3451
3452 Within the object file, the text section starts at address @code{0}, the
3453 data section follows, and the bss section follows the data section.
3454
3455 @ifset HPPA
3456 When generating either SOM or ELF output files on the HPPA, the text
3457 section starts at address @code{0}, the data section at address
3458 @code{0x4000000}, and the bss section follows the data section.
3459 @end ifset
3460
3461 To let @code{@value{LD}} know which data changes when the sections are
3462 relocated, and how to change that data, @command{@value{AS}} also writes to the
3463 object file details of the relocation needed. To perform relocation
3464 @code{@value{LD}} must know, each time an address in the object
3465 file is mentioned:
3466 @itemize @bullet
3467 @item
3468 Where in the object file is the beginning of this reference to
3469 an address?
3470 @item
3471 How long (in bytes) is this reference?
3472 @item
3473 Which section does the address refer to? What is the numeric value of
3474 @display
3475 (@var{address}) @minus{} (@var{start-address of section})?
3476 @end display
3477 @item
3478 Is the reference to an address ``Program-Counter relative''?
3479 @end itemize
3480
3481 @cindex addresses, format of
3482 @cindex section-relative addressing
3483 In fact, every address @command{@value{AS}} ever uses is expressed as
3484 @display
3485 (@var{section}) + (@var{offset into section})
3486 @end display
3487 @noindent
3488 Further, most expressions @command{@value{AS}} computes have this section-relative
3489 nature.
3490 @ifset SOM
3491 (For some object formats, such as SOM for the HPPA, some expressions are
3492 symbol-relative instead.)
3493 @end ifset
3494
3495 In this manual we use the notation @{@var{secname} @var{N}@} to mean ``offset
3496 @var{N} into section @var{secname}.''
3497
3498 Apart from text, data and bss sections you need to know about the
3499 @dfn{absolute} section. When @code{@value{LD}} mixes partial programs,
3500 addresses in the absolute section remain unchanged. For example, address
3501 @code{@{absolute 0@}} is ``relocated'' to run-time address 0 by
3502 @code{@value{LD}}. Although the linker never arranges two partial programs'
3503 data sections with overlapping addresses after linking, @emph{by definition}
3504 their absolute sections must overlap. Address @code{@{absolute@ 239@}} in one
3505 part of a program is always the same address when the program is running as
3506 address @code{@{absolute@ 239@}} in any other part of the program.
3507
3508 The idea of sections is extended to the @dfn{undefined} section. Any
3509 address whose section is unknown at assembly time is by definition
3510 rendered @{undefined @var{U}@}---where @var{U} is filled in later.
3511 Since numbers are always defined, the only way to generate an undefined
3512 address is to mention an undefined symbol. A reference to a named
3513 common block would be such a symbol: its value is unknown at assembly
3514 time so it has section @emph{undefined}.
3515
3516 By analogy the word @emph{section} is used to describe groups of sections in
3517 the linked program. @code{@value{LD}} puts all partial programs' text
3518 sections in contiguous addresses in the linked program. It is
3519 customary to refer to the @emph{text section} of a program, meaning all
3520 the addresses of all partial programs' text sections. Likewise for
3521 data and bss sections.
3522
3523 Some sections are manipulated by @code{@value{LD}}; others are invented for
3524 use of @command{@value{AS}} and have no meaning except during assembly.
3525
3526 @node Ld Sections
3527 @section Linker Sections
3528 @code{@value{LD}} deals with just four kinds of sections, summarized below.
3529
3530 @table @strong
3531
3532 @ifset COFF-ELF
3533 @cindex named sections
3534 @cindex sections, named
3535 @item named sections
3536 @end ifset
3537 @ifset aout
3538 @cindex text section
3539 @cindex data section
3540 @itemx text section
3541 @itemx data section
3542 @end ifset
3543 These sections hold your program. @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} treat them as
3544 separate but equal sections. Anything you can say of one section is
3545 true of another.
3546 @c @ifset aout
3547 When the program is running, however, it is
3548 customary for the text section to be unalterable. The
3549 text section is often shared among processes: it contains
3550 instructions, constants and the like. The data section of a running
3551 program is usually alterable: for example, C variables would be stored
3552 in the data section.
3553 @c @end ifset
3554
3555 @cindex bss section
3556 @item bss section
3557 This section contains zeroed bytes when your program begins running. It
3558 is used to hold uninitialized variables or common storage. The length of
3559 each partial program's bss section is important, but because it starts
3560 out containing zeroed bytes there is no need to store explicit zero
3561 bytes in the object file. The bss section was invented to eliminate
3562 those explicit zeros from object files.
3563
3564 @cindex absolute section
3565 @item absolute section
3566 Address 0 of this section is always ``relocated'' to runtime address 0.
3567 This is useful if you want to refer to an address that @code{@value{LD}} must
3568 not change when relocating. In this sense we speak of absolute
3569 addresses being ``unrelocatable'': they do not change during relocation.
3570
3571 @cindex undefined section
3572 @item undefined section
3573 This ``section'' is a catch-all for address references to objects not in
3574 the preceding sections.
3575 @c FIXME: ref to some other doc on obj-file formats could go here.
3576 @end table
3577
3578 @cindex relocation example
3579 An idealized example of three relocatable sections follows.
3580 @ifset COFF-ELF
3581 The example uses the traditional section names @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}.
3582 @end ifset
3583 Memory addresses are on the horizontal axis.
3584
3585 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3586 @ifnottex
3587 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3588 @smallexample
3589 +-----+----+--+
3590 partial program # 1: |ttttt|dddd|00|
3591 +-----+----+--+
3592
3593 text data bss
3594 seg. seg. seg.
3595
3596 +---+---+---+
3597 partial program # 2: |TTT|DDD|000|
3598 +---+---+---+
3599
3600 +--+---+-----+--+----+---+-----+~~
3601 linked program: | |TTT|ttttt| |dddd|DDD|00000|
3602 +--+---+-----+--+----+---+-----+~~
3603
3604 addresses: 0 @dots{}
3605 @end smallexample
3606 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3607 @end ifnottex
3608 @need 5000
3609 @tex
3610 \bigskip
3611 \line{\it Partial program \#1: \hfil}
3612 \line{\ibox{2.5cm}{\tt text}\ibox{2cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3613 \line{\boxit{2.5cm}{\tt ttttt}\boxit{2cm}{\tt dddd}\boxit{1cm}{\tt 00}\hfil}
3614
3615 \line{\it Partial program \#2: \hfil}
3616 \line{\ibox{1cm}{\tt text}\ibox{1.5cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3617 \line{\boxit{1cm}{\tt TTT}\boxit{1.5cm}{\tt DDDD}\boxit{1cm}{\tt 000}\hfil}
3618
3619 \line{\it linked program: \hfil}
3620 \line{\ibox{.5cm}{}\ibox{1cm}{\tt text}\ibox{2.5cm}{}\ibox{.75cm}{}\ibox{2cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1.5cm}{}\ibox{2cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3621 \line{\boxit{.5cm}{}\boxit{1cm}{\tt TTT}\boxit{2.5cm}{\tt
3622 ttttt}\boxit{.75cm}{}\boxit{2cm}{\tt dddd}\boxit{1.5cm}{\tt
3623 DDDD}\boxit{2cm}{\tt 00000}\ \dots\hfil}
3624
3625 \line{\it addresses: \hfil}
3626 \line{0\dots\hfil}
3627
3628 @end tex
3629 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3630
3631 @node As Sections
3632 @section Assembler Internal Sections
3633
3634 @cindex internal assembler sections
3635 @cindex sections in messages, internal
3636 These sections are meant only for the internal use of @command{@value{AS}}. They
3637 have no meaning at run-time. You do not really need to know about these
3638 sections for most purposes; but they can be mentioned in @command{@value{AS}}
3639 warning messages, so it might be helpful to have an idea of their
3640 meanings to @command{@value{AS}}. These sections are used to permit the
3641 value of every expression in your assembly language program to be a
3642 section-relative address.
3643
3644 @table @b
3645 @cindex assembler internal logic error
3646 @item ASSEMBLER-INTERNAL-LOGIC-ERROR!
3647 An internal assembler logic error has been found. This means there is a
3648 bug in the assembler.
3649
3650 @cindex expr (internal section)
3651 @item expr section
3652 The assembler stores complex expression internally as combinations of
3653 symbols. When it needs to represent an expression as a symbol, it puts
3654 it in the expr section.
3655 @c FIXME item debug
3656 @c FIXME item transfer[t] vector preload
3657 @c FIXME item transfer[t] vector postload
3658 @c FIXME item register
3659 @end table
3660
3661 @node Sub-Sections
3662 @section Sub-Sections
3663
3664 @cindex numbered subsections
3665 @cindex grouping data
3666 @ifset aout
3667 Assembled bytes
3668 @ifset COFF-ELF
3669 conventionally
3670 @end ifset
3671 fall into two sections: text and data.
3672 @end ifset
3673 You may have separate groups of
3674 @ifset GENERIC
3675 data in named sections
3676 @end ifset
3677 @ifclear GENERIC
3678 @ifclear aout
3679 data in named sections
3680 @end ifclear
3681 @ifset aout
3682 text or data
3683 @end ifset
3684 @end ifclear
3685 that you want to end up near to each other in the object file, even though they
3686 are not contiguous in the assembler source. @command{@value{AS}} allows you to
3687 use @dfn{subsections} for this purpose. Within each section, there can be
3688 numbered subsections with values from 0 to 8192. Objects assembled into the
3689 same subsection go into the object file together with other objects in the same
3690 subsection. For example, a compiler might want to store constants in the text
3691 section, but might not want to have them interspersed with the program being
3692 assembled. In this case, the compiler could issue a @samp{.text 0} before each
3693 section of code being output, and a @samp{.text 1} before each group of
3694 constants being output.
3695
3696 Subsections are optional. If you do not use subsections, everything
3697 goes in subsection number zero.
3698
3699 @ifset GENERIC
3700 Each subsection is zero-padded up to a multiple of four bytes.
3701 (Subsections may be padded a different amount on different flavors
3702 of @command{@value{AS}}.)
3703 @end ifset
3704 @ifclear GENERIC
3705 @ifset H8
3706 On the H8/300 platform, each subsection is zero-padded to a word
3707 boundary (two bytes).
3708 The same is true on the Renesas SH.
3709 @end ifset
3710 @end ifclear
3711
3712 Subsections appear in your object file in numeric order, lowest numbered
3713 to highest. (All this to be compatible with other people's assemblers.)
3714 The object file contains no representation of subsections; @code{@value{LD}} and
3715 other programs that manipulate object files see no trace of them.
3716 They just see all your text subsections as a text section, and all your
3717 data subsections as a data section.
3718
3719 To specify which subsection you want subsequent statements assembled
3720 into, use a numeric argument to specify it, in a @samp{.text
3721 @var{expression}} or a @samp{.data @var{expression}} statement.
3722 @ifset COFF
3723 @ifset GENERIC
3724 When generating COFF output, you
3725 @end ifset
3726 @ifclear GENERIC
3727 You
3728 @end ifclear
3729 can also use an extra subsection
3730 argument with arbitrary named sections: @samp{.section @var{name},
3731 @var{expression}}.
3732 @end ifset
3733 @ifset ELF
3734 @ifset GENERIC
3735 When generating ELF output, you
3736 @end ifset
3737 @ifclear GENERIC
3738 You
3739 @end ifclear
3740 can also use the @code{.subsection} directive (@pxref{SubSection})
3741 to specify a subsection: @samp{.subsection @var{expression}}.
3742 @end ifset
3743 @var{Expression} should be an absolute expression
3744 (@pxref{Expressions}). If you just say @samp{.text} then @samp{.text 0}
3745 is assumed. Likewise @samp{.data} means @samp{.data 0}. Assembly
3746 begins in @code{text 0}. For instance:
3747 @smallexample
3748 .text 0 # The default subsection is text 0 anyway.
3749 .ascii "This lives in the first text subsection. *"
3750 .text 1
3751 .ascii "But this lives in the second text subsection."
3752 .data 0
3753 .ascii "This lives in the data section,"
3754 .ascii "in the first data subsection."
3755 .text 0
3756 .ascii "This lives in the first text section,"
3757 .ascii "immediately following the asterisk (*)."
3758 @end smallexample
3759
3760 Each section has a @dfn{location counter} incremented by one for every byte
3761 assembled into that section. Because subsections are merely a convenience
3762 restricted to @command{@value{AS}} there is no concept of a subsection location
3763 counter. There is no way to directly manipulate a location counter---but the
3764 @code{.align} directive changes it, and any label definition captures its
3765 current value. The location counter of the section where statements are being
3766 assembled is said to be the @dfn{active} location counter.
3767
3768 @node bss
3769 @section bss Section
3770
3771 @cindex bss section
3772 @cindex common variable storage
3773 The bss section is used for local common variable storage.
3774 You may allocate address space in the bss section, but you may
3775 not dictate data to load into it before your program executes. When
3776 your program starts running, all the contents of the bss
3777 section are zeroed bytes.
3778
3779 The @code{.lcomm} pseudo-op defines a symbol in the bss section; see
3780 @ref{Lcomm,,@code{.lcomm}}.
3781
3782 The @code{.comm} pseudo-op may be used to declare a common symbol, which is
3783 another form of uninitialized symbol; see @ref{Comm,,@code{.comm}}.
3784
3785 @ifset GENERIC
3786 When assembling for a target which supports multiple sections, such as ELF or
3787 COFF, you may switch into the @code{.bss} section and define symbols as usual;
3788 see @ref{Section,,@code{.section}}. You may only assemble zero values into the
3789 section. Typically the section will only contain symbol definitions and
3790 @code{.skip} directives (@pxref{Skip,,@code{.skip}}).
3791 @end ifset
3792
3793 @node Symbols
3794 @chapter Symbols
3795
3796 @cindex symbols
3797 Symbols are a central concept: the programmer uses symbols to name
3798 things, the linker uses symbols to link, and the debugger uses symbols
3799 to debug.
3800
3801 @quotation
3802 @cindex debuggers, and symbol order
3803 @emph{Warning:} @command{@value{AS}} does not place symbols in the object file in
3804 the same order they were declared. This may break some debuggers.
3805 @end quotation
3806
3807 @menu
3808 * Labels:: Labels
3809 * Setting Symbols:: Giving Symbols Other Values
3810 * Symbol Names:: Symbol Names
3811 * Dot:: The Special Dot Symbol
3812 * Symbol Attributes:: Symbol Attributes
3813 @end menu
3814
3815 @node Labels
3816 @section Labels
3817
3818 @cindex labels
3819 A @dfn{label} is written as a symbol immediately followed by a colon
3820 @samp{:}. The symbol then represents the current value of the
3821 active location counter, and is, for example, a suitable instruction
3822 operand. You are warned if you use the same symbol to represent two
3823 different locations: the first definition overrides any other
3824 definitions.
3825
3826 @ifset HPPA
3827 On the HPPA, the usual form for a label need not be immediately followed by a
3828 colon, but instead must start in column zero. Only one label may be defined on
3829 a single line. To work around this, the HPPA version of @command{@value{AS}} also
3830 provides a special directive @code{.label} for defining labels more flexibly.
3831 @end ifset
3832
3833 @node Setting Symbols
3834 @section Giving Symbols Other Values
3835
3836 @cindex assigning values to symbols
3837 @cindex symbol values, assigning
3838 A symbol can be given an arbitrary value by writing a symbol, followed
3839 by an equals sign @samp{=}, followed by an expression
3840 (@pxref{Expressions}). This is equivalent to using the @code{.set}
3841 directive. @xref{Set,,@code{.set}}. In the same way, using a double
3842 equals sign @samp{=}@samp{=} here represents an equivalent of the
3843 @code{.eqv} directive. @xref{Eqv,,@code{.eqv}}.
3844
3845 @ifset Blackfin
3846 Blackfin does not support symbol assignment with @samp{=}.
3847 @end ifset
3848
3849 @node Symbol Names
3850 @section Symbol Names
3851
3852 @cindex symbol names
3853 @cindex names, symbol
3854 @ifclear SPECIAL-SYMS
3855 Symbol names begin with a letter or with one of @samp{._}. On most
3856 machines, you can also use @code{$} in symbol names; exceptions are
3857 noted in @ref{Machine Dependencies}. That character may be followed by any
3858 string of digits, letters, dollar signs (unless otherwise noted for a
3859 particular target machine), and underscores. These restrictions do not
3860 apply when quoting symbol names by @samp{"}, which is permitted for most
3861 targets. Escaping characters in quoted symbol names with @samp{\} generally
3862 extends only to @samp{\} itself and @samp{"}, at the time of writing.
3863 @end ifclear
3864 @ifset SPECIAL-SYMS
3865 @ifset H8
3866 Symbol names begin with a letter or with one of @samp{._}. On the
3867 Renesas SH you can also use @code{$} in symbol names. That
3868 character may be followed by any string of digits, letters, dollar signs (save
3869 on the H8/300), and underscores.
3870 @end ifset
3871 @end ifset
3872
3873 Case of letters is significant: @code{foo} is a different symbol name
3874 than @code{Foo}.
3875
3876 Symbol names do not start with a digit. An exception to this rule is made for
3877 Local Labels. See below.
3878
3879 Multibyte characters are supported, but note that the setting of the
3880 @option{multibyte-handling} option might prevent their use.
3881 To generate a symbol name containing
3882 multibyte characters enclose it within double quotes and use escape codes. cf
3883 @xref{Strings}. Generating a multibyte symbol name from a label is not
3884 currently supported.
3885
3886 Since multibyte symbol names are unusual, and could possibly be used
3887 maliciously, @command{@value{AS}} provides a command line option
3888 (@option{--multibyte-handling=warn-sym-only}) which can be used to generate a
3889 warning message whenever a symbol name containing multibyte characters is defined.
3890
3891 Each symbol has exactly one name. Each name in an assembly language program
3892 refers to exactly one symbol. You may use that symbol name any number of times
3893 in a program.
3894
3895 @subheading Local Symbol Names
3896
3897 @cindex local symbol names
3898 @cindex symbol names, local
3899 A local symbol is any symbol beginning with certain local label prefixes.
3900 By default, the local label prefix is @samp{.L} for ELF systems or
3901 @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems, but each target may have its own
3902 set of local label prefixes.
3903 @ifset HPPA
3904 On the HPPA local symbols begin with @samp{L$}.
3905 @end ifset
3906
3907 Local symbols are defined and used within the assembler, but they are
3908 normally not saved in object files. Thus, they are not visible when debugging.
3909 You may use the @samp{-L} option (@pxref{L, ,Include Local Symbols})
3910 to retain the local symbols in the object files.
3911
3912 @subheading Local Labels
3913
3914 @cindex local labels
3915 @cindex temporary symbol names
3916 @cindex symbol names, temporary
3917 Local labels are different from local symbols. Local labels help compilers and
3918 programmers use names temporarily. They create symbols which are guaranteed to
3919 be unique over the entire scope of the input source code and which can be
3920 referred to by a simple notation. To define a local label, write a label of
3921 the form @samp{@b{N}:} (where @b{N} represents any non-negative integer).
3922 To refer to the most recent previous definition of that label write
3923 @samp{@b{N}b}, using the same number as when you defined the label. To refer
3924 to the next definition of a local label, write @samp{@b{N}f}. The @samp{b}
3925 stands for ``backwards'' and the @samp{f} stands for ``forwards''.
3926
3927 There is no restriction on how you can use these labels, and you can reuse them
3928 too. So that it is possible to repeatedly define the same local label (using
3929 the same number @samp{@b{N}}), although you can only refer to the most recently
3930 defined local label of that number (for a backwards reference) or the next
3931 definition of a specific local label for a forward reference. It is also worth
3932 noting that the first 10 local labels (@samp{@b{0:}}@dots{}@samp{@b{9:}}) are
3933 implemented in a slightly more efficient manner than the others.
3934
3935 Here is an example:
3936
3937 @smallexample
3938 1: branch 1f
3939 2: branch 1b
3940 1: branch 2f
3941 2: branch 1b
3942 @end smallexample
3943
3944 Which is the equivalent of:
3945
3946 @smallexample
3947 label_1: branch label_3
3948 label_2: branch label_1
3949 label_3: branch label_4
3950 label_4: branch label_3
3951 @end smallexample
3952
3953 Local label names are only a notational device. They are immediately
3954 transformed into more conventional symbol names before the assembler uses them.
3955 The symbol names are stored in the symbol table, appear in error messages, and
3956 are optionally emitted to the object file. The names are constructed using
3957 these parts:
3958
3959 @table @code
3960 @item @emph{local label prefix}
3961 All local symbols begin with the system-specific local label prefix.
3962 Normally both @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} forget symbols
3963 that start with the local label prefix. These labels are
3964 used for symbols you are never intended to see. If you use the
3965 @samp{-L} option then @command{@value{AS}} retains these symbols in the
3966 object file. If you also instruct @code{@value{LD}} to retain these symbols,
3967 you may use them in debugging.
3968
3969 @item @var{number}
3970 This is the number that was used in the local label definition. So if the
3971 label is written @samp{55:} then the number is @samp{55}.
3972
3973 @item @kbd{C-B}
3974 This unusual character is included so you do not accidentally invent a symbol
3975 of the same name. The character has ASCII value of @samp{\002} (control-B).
3976
3977 @item @emph{ordinal number}
3978 This is a serial number to keep the labels distinct. The first definition of
3979 @samp{0:} gets the number @samp{1}. The 15th definition of @samp{0:} gets the
3980 number @samp{15}, and so on. Likewise the first definition of @samp{1:} gets
3981 the number @samp{1} and its 15th definition gets @samp{15} as well.
3982 @end table
3983
3984 So for example, the first @code{1:} may be named @code{.L1@kbd{C-B}1}, and
3985 the 44th @code{3:} may be named @code{.L3@kbd{C-B}44}.
3986
3987 @subheading Dollar Local Labels
3988 @cindex dollar local symbols
3989
3990 On some targets @code{@value{AS}} also supports an even more local form of
3991 local labels called dollar labels. These labels go out of scope (i.e., they
3992 become undefined) as soon as a non-local label is defined. Thus they remain
3993 valid for only a small region of the input source code. Normal local labels,
3994 by contrast, remain in scope for the entire file, or until they are redefined
3995 by another occurrence of the same local label.
3996
3997 Dollar labels are defined in exactly the same way as ordinary local labels,
3998 except that they have a dollar sign suffix to their numeric value, e.g.,
3999 @samp{@b{55$:}}.
4000
4001 They can also be distinguished from ordinary local labels by their transformed
4002 names which use ASCII character @samp{\001} (control-A) as the magic character
4003 to distinguish them from ordinary labels. For example, the fifth definition of
4004 @samp{6$} may be named @samp{.L6@kbd{C-A}5}.
4005
4006 @node Dot
4007 @section The Special Dot Symbol
4008
4009 @cindex dot (symbol)
4010 @cindex @code{.} (symbol)
4011 @cindex current address
4012 @cindex location counter
4013 The special symbol @samp{.} refers to the current address that
4014 @command{@value{AS}} is assembling into. Thus, the expression @samp{melvin:
4015 .long .} defines @code{melvin} to contain its own address.
4016 Assigning a value to @code{.} is treated the same as a @code{.org}
4017 directive.
4018 @ifclear no-space-dir
4019 Thus, the expression @samp{.=.+4} is the same as saying
4020 @samp{.space 4}.
4021 @end ifclear
4022
4023 @node Symbol Attributes
4024 @section Symbol Attributes
4025
4026 @cindex symbol attributes
4027 @cindex attributes, symbol
4028 Every symbol has, as well as its name, the attributes ``Value'' and
4029 ``Type''. Depending on output format, symbols can also have auxiliary
4030 attributes.
4031 @ifset INTERNALS
4032 The detailed definitions are in @file{a.out.h}.
4033 @end ifset
4034
4035 If you use a symbol without defining it, @command{@value{AS}} assumes zero for
4036 all these attributes, and probably won't warn you. This makes the
4037 symbol an externally defined symbol, which is generally what you
4038 would want.
4039
4040 @menu
4041 * Symbol Value:: Value
4042 * Symbol Type:: Type
4043 @ifset aout
4044 * a.out Symbols:: Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
4045 @end ifset
4046 @ifset COFF
4047 * COFF Symbols:: Symbol Attributes for COFF
4048 @end ifset
4049 @ifset SOM
4050 * SOM Symbols:: Symbol Attributes for SOM
4051 @end ifset
4052 @end menu
4053
4054 @node Symbol Value
4055 @subsection Value
4056
4057 @cindex value of a symbol
4058 @cindex symbol value
4059 The value of a symbol is (usually) 32 bits. For a symbol which labels a
4060 location in the text, data, bss or absolute sections the value is the
4061 number of addresses from the start of that section to the label.
4062 Naturally for text, data and bss sections the value of a symbol changes
4063 as @code{@value{LD}} changes section base addresses during linking. Absolute
4064 symbols' values do not change during linking: that is why they are
4065 called absolute.
4066
4067 The value of an undefined symbol is treated in a special way. If it is
4068 0 then the symbol is not defined in this assembler source file, and
4069 @code{@value{LD}} tries to determine its value from other files linked into the
4070 same program. You make this kind of symbol simply by mentioning a symbol
4071 name without defining it. A non-zero value represents a @code{.comm}
4072 common declaration. The value is how much common storage to reserve, in
4073 bytes (addresses). The symbol refers to the first address of the
4074 allocated storage.
4075
4076 @node Symbol Type
4077 @subsection Type
4078
4079 @cindex type of a symbol
4080 @cindex symbol type
4081 The type attribute of a symbol contains relocation (section)
4082 information, any flag settings indicating that a symbol is external, and
4083 (optionally), other information for linkers and debuggers. The exact
4084 format depends on the object-code output format in use.
4085
4086 @ifset aout
4087 @node a.out Symbols
4088 @subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
4089
4090 @cindex @code{a.out} symbol attributes
4091 @cindex symbol attributes, @code{a.out}
4092
4093 @menu
4094 * Symbol Desc:: Descriptor
4095 * Symbol Other:: Other
4096 @end menu
4097
4098 @node Symbol Desc
4099 @subsubsection Descriptor
4100
4101 @cindex descriptor, of @code{a.out} symbol
4102 This is an arbitrary 16-bit value. You may establish a symbol's
4103 descriptor value by using a @code{.desc} statement
4104 (@pxref{Desc,,@code{.desc}}). A descriptor value means nothing to
4105 @command{@value{AS}}.
4106
4107 @node Symbol Other
4108 @subsubsection Other
4109
4110 @cindex other attribute, of @code{a.out} symbol
4111 This is an arbitrary 8-bit value. It means nothing to @command{@value{AS}}.
4112 @end ifset
4113
4114 @ifset COFF
4115 @node COFF Symbols
4116 @subsection Symbol Attributes for COFF
4117
4118 @cindex COFF symbol attributes
4119 @cindex symbol attributes, COFF
4120
4121 The COFF format supports a multitude of auxiliary symbol attributes;
4122 like the primary symbol attributes, they are set between @code{.def} and
4123 @code{.endef} directives.
4124
4125 @subsubsection Primary Attributes
4126
4127 @cindex primary attributes, COFF symbols
4128 The symbol name is set with @code{.def}; the value and type,
4129 respectively, with @code{.val} and @code{.type}.
4130
4131 @subsubsection Auxiliary Attributes
4132
4133 @cindex auxiliary attributes, COFF symbols
4134 The @command{@value{AS}} directives @code{.dim}, @code{.line}, @code{.scl},
4135 @code{.size}, @code{.tag}, and @code{.weak} can generate auxiliary symbol
4136 table information for COFF.
4137 @end ifset
4138
4139 @ifset SOM
4140 @node SOM Symbols
4141 @subsection Symbol Attributes for SOM
4142
4143 @cindex SOM symbol attributes
4144 @cindex symbol attributes, SOM
4145
4146 The SOM format for the HPPA supports a multitude of symbol attributes set with
4147 the @code{.EXPORT} and @code{.IMPORT} directives.
4148
4149 The attributes are described in @cite{HP9000 Series 800 Assembly
4150 Language Reference Manual} (HP 92432-90001) under the @code{IMPORT} and
4151 @code{EXPORT} assembler directive documentation.
4152 @end ifset
4153
4154 @node Expressions
4155 @chapter Expressions
4156
4157 @cindex expressions
4158 @cindex addresses
4159 @cindex numeric values
4160 An @dfn{expression} specifies an address or numeric value.
4161 Whitespace may precede and/or follow an expression.
4162
4163 The result of an expression must be an absolute number, or else an offset into
4164 a particular section. If an expression is not absolute, and there is not
4165 enough information when @command{@value{AS}} sees the expression to know its
4166 section, a second pass over the source program might be necessary to interpret
4167 the expression---but the second pass is currently not implemented.
4168 @command{@value{AS}} aborts with an error message in this situation.
4169
4170 @menu
4171 * Empty Exprs:: Empty Expressions
4172 * Integer Exprs:: Integer Expressions
4173 @end menu
4174
4175 @node Empty Exprs
4176 @section Empty Expressions
4177
4178 @cindex empty expressions
4179 @cindex expressions, empty
4180 An empty expression has no value: it is just whitespace or null.
4181 Wherever an absolute expression is required, you may omit the
4182 expression, and @command{@value{AS}} assumes a value of (absolute) 0. This
4183 is compatible with other assemblers.
4184
4185 @node Integer Exprs
4186 @section Integer Expressions
4187
4188 @cindex integer expressions
4189 @cindex expressions, integer
4190 An @dfn{integer expression} is one or more @emph{arguments} delimited
4191 by @emph{operators}.
4192
4193 @menu
4194 * Arguments:: Arguments
4195 * Operators:: Operators
4196 * Prefix Ops:: Prefix Operators
4197 * Infix Ops:: Infix Operators
4198 @end menu
4199
4200 @node Arguments
4201 @subsection Arguments
4202
4203 @cindex expression arguments
4204 @cindex arguments in expressions
4205 @cindex operands in expressions
4206 @cindex arithmetic operands
4207 @dfn{Arguments} are symbols, numbers or subexpressions. In other
4208 contexts arguments are sometimes called ``arithmetic operands''. In
4209 this manual, to avoid confusing them with the ``instruction operands'' of
4210 the machine language, we use the term ``argument'' to refer to parts of
4211 expressions only, reserving the word ``operand'' to refer only to machine
4212 instruction operands.
4213
4214 Symbols are evaluated to yield @{@var{section} @var{NNN}@} where
4215 @var{section} is one of text, data, bss, absolute,
4216 or undefined. @var{NNN} is a signed, 2's complement 32 bit
4217 integer.
4218
4219 Numbers are usually integers.
4220
4221 A number can be a flonum or bignum. In this case, you are warned
4222 that only the low order 32 bits are used, and @command{@value{AS}} pretends
4223 these 32 bits are an integer. You may write integer-manipulating
4224 instructions that act on exotic constants, compatible with other
4225 assemblers.
4226
4227 @cindex subexpressions
4228 Subexpressions are a left parenthesis @samp{(} followed by an integer
4229 expression, followed by a right parenthesis @samp{)}; or a prefix
4230 operator followed by an argument.
4231
4232 @node Operators
4233 @subsection Operators
4234
4235 @cindex operators, in expressions
4236 @cindex arithmetic functions
4237 @cindex functions, in expressions
4238 @dfn{Operators} are arithmetic functions, like @code{+} or @code{%}. Prefix
4239 operators are followed by an argument. Infix operators appear
4240 between their arguments. Operators may be preceded and/or followed by
4241 whitespace.
4242
4243 @node Prefix Ops
4244 @subsection Prefix Operator
4245
4246 @cindex prefix operators
4247 @command{@value{AS}} has the following @dfn{prefix operators}. They each take
4248 one argument, which must be absolute.
4249
4250 @c the tex/end tex stuff surrounding this small table is meant to make
4251 @c it align, on the printed page, with the similar table in the next
4252 @c section (which is inside an enumerate).
4253 @tex
4254 \global\advance\leftskip by \itemindent
4255 @end tex
4256
4257 @table @code
4258 @item -
4259 @dfn{Negation}. Two's complement negation.
4260 @item ~
4261 @dfn{Complementation}. Bitwise not.
4262 @end table
4263
4264 @tex
4265 \global\advance\leftskip by -\itemindent
4266 @end tex
4267
4268 @node Infix Ops
4269 @subsection Infix Operators
4270
4271 @cindex infix operators
4272 @cindex operators, permitted arguments
4273 @dfn{Infix operators} take two arguments, one on either side. Operators
4274 have precedence, but operations with equal precedence are performed left
4275 to right. Apart from @code{+} or @option{-}, both arguments must be
4276 absolute, and the result is absolute.
4277
4278 @enumerate
4279 @cindex operator precedence
4280 @cindex precedence of operators
4281
4282 @item
4283 Highest Precedence
4284
4285 @table @code
4286 @item *
4287 @dfn{Multiplication}.
4288
4289 @item /
4290 @dfn{Division}. Truncation is the same as the C operator @samp{/}
4291
4292 @item %
4293 @dfn{Remainder}.
4294
4295 @item <<
4296 @dfn{Shift Left}. Same as the C operator @samp{<<}.
4297
4298 @item >>
4299 @dfn{Shift Right}. Same as the C operator @samp{>>}.
4300 @end table
4301
4302 @item
4303 Intermediate precedence
4304
4305 @table @code
4306 @item |
4307
4308 @dfn{Bitwise Inclusive Or}.
4309
4310 @item &
4311 @dfn{Bitwise And}.
4312
4313 @item ^
4314 @dfn{Bitwise Exclusive Or}.
4315
4316 @item !
4317 @dfn{Bitwise Or Not}.
4318 @end table
4319
4320 @item
4321 Low Precedence
4322
4323 @table @code
4324 @cindex addition, permitted arguments
4325 @cindex plus, permitted arguments
4326 @cindex arguments for addition
4327 @item +
4328 @dfn{Addition}. If either argument is absolute, the result has the section of
4329 the other argument. You may not add together arguments from different
4330 sections.
4331
4332 @cindex subtraction, permitted arguments
4333 @cindex minus, permitted arguments
4334 @cindex arguments for subtraction
4335 @item -
4336 @dfn{Subtraction}. If the right argument is absolute, the
4337 result has the section of the left argument.
4338 If both arguments are in the same section, the result is absolute.
4339 You may not subtract arguments from different sections.
4340 @c FIXME is there still something useful to say about undefined - undefined ?
4341
4342 @cindex comparison expressions
4343 @cindex expressions, comparison
4344 @item ==
4345 @dfn{Is Equal To}
4346 @item <>
4347 @itemx !=
4348 @dfn{Is Not Equal To}
4349 @item <
4350 @dfn{Is Less Than}
4351 @item >
4352 @dfn{Is Greater Than}
4353 @item >=
4354 @dfn{Is Greater Than Or Equal To}
4355 @item <=
4356 @dfn{Is Less Than Or Equal To}
4357
4358 The comparison operators can be used as infix operators. A true result has a
4359 value of -1 whereas a false result has a value of 0. Note, these operators
4360 perform signed comparisons.
4361 @end table
4362
4363 @item Lowest Precedence
4364
4365 @table @code
4366 @item &&
4367 @dfn{Logical And}.
4368
4369 @item ||
4370 @dfn{Logical Or}.
4371
4372 These two logical operations can be used to combine the results of sub
4373 expressions. Note, unlike the comparison operators a true result returns a
4374 value of 1 but a false results does still return 0. Also note that the logical
4375 or operator has a slightly lower precedence than logical and.
4376
4377 @end table
4378 @end enumerate
4379
4380 In short, it's only meaningful to add or subtract the @emph{offsets} in an
4381 address; you can only have a defined section in one of the two arguments.
4382
4383 @node Pseudo Ops
4384 @chapter Assembler Directives
4385
4386 @cindex directives, machine independent
4387 @cindex pseudo-ops, machine independent
4388 @cindex machine independent directives
4389 All assembler directives have names that begin with a period (@samp{.}).
4390 The names are case insensitive for most targets, and usually written
4391 in lower case.
4392
4393 This chapter discusses directives that are available regardless of the
4394 target machine configuration for the @sc{gnu} assembler.
4395 @ifset GENERIC
4396 Some machine configurations provide additional directives.
4397 @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
4398 @end ifset
4399 @ifclear GENERIC
4400 @ifset machine-directives
4401 @xref{Machine Dependencies}, for additional directives.
4402 @end ifset
4403 @end ifclear
4404
4405 @menu
4406 * Abort:: @code{.abort}
4407 @ifset COFF
4408 * ABORT (COFF):: @code{.ABORT}
4409 @end ifset
4410
4411 * Align:: @code{.align [@var{abs-expr}[, @var{abs-expr}[, @var{abs-expr}]]]}
4412 * Altmacro:: @code{.altmacro}
4413 * Ascii:: @code{.ascii "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4414 * Asciz:: @code{.asciz "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4415 * Attach_to_group:: @code{.attach_to_group @var{name}}
4416 * Balign:: @code{.balign [@var{abs-expr}[, @var{abs-expr}]]}
4417 * Bss:: @code{.bss @var{subsection}}
4418 * Bundle directives:: @code{.bundle_align_mode @var{abs-expr}}, etc
4419 * Byte:: @code{.byte @var{expressions}}
4420 * CFI directives:: @code{.cfi_startproc [simple]}, @code{.cfi_endproc}, etc.
4421 * Comm:: @code{.comm @var{symbol} , @var{length} }
4422 * Data:: @code{.data @var{subsection}}
4423 * Dc:: @code{.dc[@var{size}] @var{expressions}}
4424 * Dcb:: @code{.dcb[@var{size}] @var{number} [,@var{fill}]}
4425 * Ds:: @code{.ds[@var{size}] @var{number} [,@var{fill}]}
4426 @ifset COFF
4427 * Def:: @code{.def @var{name}}
4428 @end ifset
4429 @ifset aout
4430 * Desc:: @code{.desc @var{symbol}, @var{abs-expression}}
4431 @end ifset
4432 @ifset COFF
4433 * Dim:: @code{.dim}
4434 @end ifset
4435
4436 * Double:: @code{.double @var{flonums}}
4437 * Eject:: @code{.eject}
4438 * Else:: @code{.else}
4439 * Elseif:: @code{.elseif}
4440 * End:: @code{.end}
4441 @ifset COFF
4442 * Endef:: @code{.endef}
4443 @end ifset
4444
4445 * Endfunc:: @code{.endfunc}
4446 * Endif:: @code{.endif}
4447 * Equ:: @code{.equ @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4448 * Equiv:: @code{.equiv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4449 * Eqv:: @code{.eqv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4450 * Err:: @code{.err}
4451 * Error:: @code{.error @var{string}}
4452 * Exitm:: @code{.exitm}
4453 * Extern:: @code{.extern}
4454 * Fail:: @code{.fail}
4455 * File:: @code{.file}
4456 * Fill:: @code{.fill @var{repeat} , @var{size} , @var{value}}
4457 * Float:: @code{.float @var{flonums}}
4458 * Func:: @code{.func}
4459 * Global:: @code{.global @var{symbol}}, @code{.globl @var{symbol}}
4460 @ifset ELF
4461 * Gnu_attribute:: @code{.gnu_attribute @var{tag},@var{value}}
4462 * Hidden:: @code{.hidden @var{names}}
4463 @end ifset
4464
4465 * hword:: @code{.hword @var{expressions}}
4466 * Ident:: @code{.ident}
4467 * If:: @code{.if @var{absolute expression}}
4468 * Incbin:: @code{.incbin "@var{file}"[,@var{skip}[,@var{count}]]}
4469 * Include:: @code{.include "@var{file}"}
4470 * Int:: @code{.int @var{expressions}}
4471 @ifset ELF
4472 * Internal:: @code{.internal @var{names}}
4473 @end ifset
4474
4475 * Irp:: @code{.irp @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
4476 * Irpc:: @code{.irpc @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
4477 * Lcomm:: @code{.lcomm @var{symbol} , @var{length}}
4478 * Lflags:: @code{.lflags}
4479 @ifclear no-line-dir
4480 * Line:: @code{.line @var{line-number}}
4481 @end ifclear
4482
4483 * Linkonce:: @code{.linkonce [@var{type}]}
4484 * List:: @code{.list}
4485 * Ln:: @code{.ln @var{line-number}}
4486 * Loc:: @code{.loc @var{fileno} @var{lineno}}
4487 * Loc_mark_labels:: @code{.loc_mark_labels @var{enable}}
4488 @ifset ELF
4489 * Local:: @code{.local @var{names}}
4490 @end ifset
4491
4492 * Long:: @code{.long @var{expressions}}
4493 @ignore
4494 * Lsym:: @code{.lsym @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4495 @end ignore
4496
4497 * Macro:: @code{.macro @var{name} @var{args}}@dots{}
4498 * MRI:: @code{.mri @var{val}}
4499 * Noaltmacro:: @code{.noaltmacro}
4500 * Nolist:: @code{.nolist}
4501 * Nop:: @code{.nop}
4502 * Nops:: @code{.nops @var{size}[, @var{control}]}
4503 * Octa:: @code{.octa @var{bignums}}
4504 * Offset:: @code{.offset @var{loc}}
4505 * Org:: @code{.org @var{new-lc}, @var{fill}}
4506 * P2align:: @code{.p2align [@var{abs-expr}[, @var{abs-expr}[, @var{abs-expr}]]]}
4507 @ifset ELF
4508 * PopSection:: @code{.popsection}
4509 * Previous:: @code{.previous}
4510 @end ifset
4511
4512 * Print:: @code{.print @var{string}}
4513 @ifset ELF
4514 * Protected:: @code{.protected @var{names}}
4515 @end ifset
4516
4517 * Psize:: @code{.psize @var{lines}, @var{columns}}
4518 * Purgem:: @code{.purgem @var{name}}
4519 @ifset ELF
4520 * PushSection:: @code{.pushsection @var{name}}
4521 @end ifset
4522
4523 * Quad:: @code{.quad @var{bignums}}
4524 * Reloc:: @code{.reloc @var{offset}, @var{reloc_name}[, @var{expression}]}
4525 * Rept:: @code{.rept @var{count}}
4526 * Sbttl:: @code{.sbttl "@var{subheading}"}
4527 @ifset COFF
4528 * Scl:: @code{.scl @var{class}}
4529 @end ifset
4530 @ifset COFF-ELF
4531 * Section:: @code{.section @var{name}[, @var{flags}]}
4532 @end ifset
4533
4534 * Set:: @code{.set @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4535 * Short:: @code{.short @var{expressions}}
4536 * Single:: @code{.single @var{flonums}}
4537 @ifset COFF-ELF
4538 * Size:: @code{.size [@var{name} , @var{expression}]}
4539 @end ifset
4540 @ifclear no-space-dir
4541 * Skip:: @code{.skip @var{size} [,@var{fill}]}
4542 @end ifclear
4543
4544 * Sleb128:: @code{.sleb128 @var{expressions}}
4545 @ifclear no-space-dir
4546 * Space:: @code{.space @var{size} [,@var{fill}]}
4547 @end ifclear
4548 @ifset have-stabs
4549 * Stab:: @code{.stabd, .stabn, .stabs}
4550 @end ifset
4551
4552 * String:: @code{.string "@var{str}"}, @code{.string8 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string16 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string32 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string64 "@var{str}"}
4553 * Struct:: @code{.struct @var{expression}}
4554 @ifset ELF
4555 * SubSection:: @code{.subsection}
4556 * Symver:: @code{.symver @var{name},@var{name2@@nodename}[,@var{visibility}]}
4557 @end ifset
4558
4559 @ifset COFF
4560 * Tag:: @code{.tag @var{structname}}
4561 @end ifset
4562
4563 * Text:: @code{.text @var{subsection}}
4564 * Title:: @code{.title "@var{heading}"}
4565 @ifset ELF
4566 * Tls_common:: @code{.tls_common @var{symbol}, @var{length}[, @var{alignment}]}
4567 @end ifset
4568 @ifset COFF-ELF
4569 * Type:: @code{.type <@var{int} | @var{name} , @var{type description}>}
4570 @end ifset
4571
4572 * Uleb128:: @code{.uleb128 @var{expressions}}
4573 @ifset COFF
4574 * Val:: @code{.val @var{addr}}
4575 @end ifset
4576
4577 @ifset ELF
4578 * Version:: @code{.version "@var{string}"}
4579 * VTableEntry:: @code{.vtable_entry @var{table}, @var{offset}}
4580 * VTableInherit:: @code{.vtable_inherit @var{child}, @var{parent}}
4581 @end ifset
4582
4583 * Warning:: @code{.warning @var{string}}
4584 * Weak:: @code{.weak @var{names}}
4585 * Weakref:: @code{.weakref @var{alias}, @var{symbol}}
4586 * Word:: @code{.word @var{expressions}}
4587 @ifclear no-space-dir
4588 * Zero:: @code{.zero @var{size}}
4589 @end ifclear
4590 * 2byte:: @code{.2byte @var{expressions}}
4591 * 4byte:: @code{.4byte @var{expressions}}
4592 * 8byte:: @code{.8byte @var{bignums}}
4593 * Deprecated:: Deprecated Directives
4594 @end menu
4595
4596 @node Abort
4597 @section @code{.abort}
4598
4599 @cindex @code{abort} directive
4600 @cindex stopping the assembly
4601 This directive stops the assembly immediately. It is for
4602 compatibility with other assemblers. The original idea was that the
4603 assembly language source would be piped into the assembler. If the sender
4604 of the source quit, it could use this directive tells @command{@value{AS}} to
4605 quit also. One day @code{.abort} will not be supported.
4606
4607 @ifset COFF
4608 @node ABORT (COFF)
4609 @section @code{.ABORT} (COFF)
4610
4611 @cindex @code{ABORT} directive
4612 When producing COFF output, @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive as a
4613 synonym for @samp{.abort}.
4614
4615 @end ifset
4616
4617 @node Align
4618 @section @code{.align [@var{abs-expr}[, @var{abs-expr}[, @var{abs-expr}]]]}
4619
4620 @cindex padding the location counter
4621 @cindex @code{align} directive
4622 Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular storage
4623 boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the alignment
4624 required, as described below. If this expression is omitted then a default
4625 value of 0 is used, effectively disabling alignment requirements.
4626
4627 The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
4628 padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the
4629 padding bytes are normally zero. However, on most systems, if the section is
4630 marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
4631 with no-op instructions.
4632
4633 The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present,
4634 it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
4635 directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
4636 specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the
4637 fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
4638 required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
4639 with no-op instructions when appropriate.
4640
4641 The way the required alignment is specified varies from system to system.
4642 For the arc, hppa, i386 using ELF, iq2000, m68k, or1k,
4643 s390, sparc, tic4x and xtensa, the first expression is the
4644 alignment request in bytes. For example @samp{.align 8} advances
4645 the location counter until it is a multiple of 8. If the location counter
4646 is already a multiple of 8, no change is needed. For the tic54x, the
4647 first expression is the alignment request in words.
4648
4649 For other systems, including ppc, i386 using a.out format, arm and
4650 strongarm, it is the
4651 number of low-order zero bits the location counter must have after
4652 advancement. For example @samp{.align 3} advances the location
4653 counter until it is a multiple of 8. If the location counter is already a
4654 multiple of 8, no change is needed.
4655
4656 This inconsistency is due to the different behaviors of the various
4657 native assemblers for these systems which GAS must emulate.
4658 GAS also provides @code{.balign} and @code{.p2align} directives,
4659 described later, which have a consistent behavior across all
4660 architectures (but are specific to GAS).
4661
4662 @node Altmacro
4663 @section @code{.altmacro}
4664 Enable alternate macro mode, enabling:
4665
4666 @ftable @code
4667 @item LOCAL @var{name} [ , @dots{} ]
4668 One additional directive, @code{LOCAL}, is available. It is used to
4669 generate a string replacement for each of the @var{name} arguments, and
4670 replace any instances of @var{name} in each macro expansion. The
4671 replacement string is unique in the assembly, and different for each
4672 separate macro expansion. @code{LOCAL} allows you to write macros that
4673 define symbols, without fear of conflict between separate macro expansions.
4674
4675 @item String delimiters
4676 You can write strings delimited in these other ways besides
4677 @code{"@var{string}"}:
4678
4679 @table @code
4680 @item '@var{string}'
4681 You can delimit strings with single-quote characters.
4682
4683 @item <@var{string}>
4684 You can delimit strings with matching angle brackets.
4685 @end table
4686
4687 @item single-character string escape
4688 To include any single character literally in a string (even if the
4689 character would otherwise have some special meaning), you can prefix the
4690 character with @samp{!} (an exclamation mark). For example, you can
4691 write @samp{<4.3 !> 5.4!!>} to get the literal text @samp{4.3 > 5.4!}.
4692
4693 @item Expression results as strings
4694 You can write @samp{%@var{expr}} to evaluate the expression @var{expr}
4695 and use the result as a string.
4696 @end ftable
4697
4698 @node Ascii
4699 @section @code{.ascii "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4700
4701 @cindex @code{ascii} directive
4702 @cindex string literals
4703 @code{.ascii} expects zero or more string literals (@pxref{Strings})
4704 separated by commas. It assembles each string (with no automatic
4705 trailing zero byte) into consecutive addresses.
4706
4707 @node Asciz
4708 @section @code{.asciz "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4709
4710 @cindex @code{asciz} directive
4711 @cindex zero-terminated strings
4712 @cindex null-terminated strings
4713 @code{.asciz} is just like @code{.ascii}, but each string is followed by
4714 a zero byte. The ``z'' in @samp{.asciz} stands for ``zero''. Note that
4715 multiple string arguments not separated by commas will be concatenated
4716 together and only one final zero byte will be stored.
4717
4718 @node Attach_to_group
4719 @section @code{.attach_to_group @var{name}}
4720 Attaches the current section to the named group. This is like declaring
4721 the section with the @code{G} attribute, but can be done after the section
4722 has been created. Note if the group section does not exist at the point that
4723 this directive is used then it will be created.
4724
4725 @node Balign
4726 @section @code{.balign[wl] [@var{abs-expr}[, @var{abs-expr}[, @var{abs-expr}]]]}
4727
4728 @cindex padding the location counter given number of bytes
4729 @cindex @code{balign} directive
4730 Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular
4731 storage boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the
4732 alignment request in bytes. For example @samp{.balign 8} advances
4733 the location counter until it is a multiple of 8. If the location counter
4734 is already a multiple of 8, no change is needed. If the expression is omitted
4735 then a default value of 0 is used, effectively disabling alignment requirements.
4736
4737 The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
4738 padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the
4739 padding bytes are normally zero. However, on most systems, if the section is
4740 marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
4741 with no-op instructions.
4742
4743 The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present,
4744 it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
4745 directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
4746 specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the
4747 fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
4748 required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
4749 with no-op instructions when appropriate.
4750
4751 @cindex @code{balignw} directive
4752 @cindex @code{balignl} directive
4753 The @code{.balignw} and @code{.balignl} directives are variants of the
4754 @code{.balign} directive. The @code{.balignw} directive treats the fill
4755 pattern as a two byte word value. The @code{.balignl} directives treats the
4756 fill pattern as a four byte longword value. For example, @code{.balignw
4757 4,0x368d} will align to a multiple of 4. If it skips two bytes, they will be
4758 filled in with the value 0x368d (the exact placement of the bytes depends upon
4759 the endianness of the processor). If it skips 1 or 3 bytes, the fill value is
4760 undefined.
4761
4762 @node Bss
4763 @section @code{.bss @var{subsection}}
4764 @cindex @code{bss} directive
4765
4766 @code{.bss} tells @command{@value{AS}} to assemble the following statements
4767 onto the end of the bss section.
4768 @ifset ELF
4769 For ELF based targets an optional @var{subsection} expression (which must
4770 evaluate to a positive integer) can be provided. In this case the statements
4771 are appended to the end of the indicated bss subsection.
4772 @end ifset
4773
4774 @node Bundle directives
4775 @section Bundle directives
4776 @subsection @code{.bundle_align_mode @var{abs-expr}}
4777 @cindex @code{bundle_align_mode} directive
4778 @cindex bundle
4779 @cindex instruction bundle
4780 @cindex aligned instruction bundle
4781 @code{.bundle_align_mode} enables or disables @dfn{aligned instruction
4782 bundle} mode. In this mode, sequences of adjacent instructions are grouped
4783 into fixed-sized @dfn{bundles}. If the argument is zero, this mode is
4784 disabled (which is the default state). If the argument it not zero, it
4785 gives the size of an instruction bundle as a power of two (as for the
4786 @code{.p2align} directive, @pxref{P2align}).
4787
4788 For some targets, it's an ABI requirement that no instruction may span a
4789 certain aligned boundary. A @dfn{bundle} is simply a sequence of
4790 instructions that starts on an aligned boundary. For example, if
4791 @var{abs-expr} is @code{5} then the bundle size is 32, so each aligned
4792 chunk of 32 bytes is a bundle. When aligned instruction bundle mode is in
4793 effect, no single instruction may span a boundary between bundles. If an
4794 instruction would start too close to the end of a bundle for the length of
4795 that particular instruction to fit within the bundle, then the space at the
4796 end of that bundle is filled with no-op instructions so the instruction
4797 starts in the next bundle. As a corollary, it's an error if any single
4798 instruction's encoding is longer than the bundle size.
4799
4800 @subsection @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock}
4801 @cindex @code{bundle_lock} directive
4802 @cindex @code{bundle_unlock} directive
4803 The @code{.bundle_lock} and directive @code{.bundle_unlock} directives
4804 allow explicit control over instruction bundle padding. These directives
4805 are only valid when @code{.bundle_align_mode} has been used to enable
4806 aligned instruction bundle mode. It's an error if they appear when
4807 @code{.bundle_align_mode} has not been used at all, or when the last
4808 directive was @w{@code{.bundle_align_mode 0}}.
4809
4810 @cindex bundle-locked
4811 For some targets, it's an ABI requirement that certain instructions may
4812 appear only as part of specified permissible sequences of multiple
4813 instructions, all within the same bundle. A pair of @code{.bundle_lock}
4814 and @code{.bundle_unlock} directives define a @dfn{bundle-locked}
4815 instruction sequence. For purposes of aligned instruction bundle mode, a
4816 sequence starting with @code{.bundle_lock} and ending with
4817 @code{.bundle_unlock} is treated as a single instruction. That is, the
4818 entire sequence must fit into a single bundle and may not span a bundle
4819 boundary. If necessary, no-op instructions will be inserted before the
4820 first instruction of the sequence so that the whole sequence starts on an
4821 aligned bundle boundary. It's an error if the sequence is longer than the
4822 bundle size.
4823
4824 For convenience when using @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock}
4825 inside assembler macros (@pxref{Macro}), bundle-locked sequences may be
4826 nested. That is, a second @code{.bundle_lock} directive before the next
4827 @code{.bundle_unlock} directive has no effect except that it must be
4828 matched by another closing @code{.bundle_unlock} so that there is the
4829 same number of @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock} directives.
4830
4831 @node Byte
4832 @section @code{.byte @var{expressions}}
4833
4834 @cindex @code{byte} directive
4835 @cindex integers, one byte
4836 @code{.byte} expects zero or more expressions, separated by commas.
4837 Each expression is assembled into the next byte.
4838
4839 @node CFI directives
4840 @section CFI directives
4841 @subsection @code{.cfi_sections @var{section_list}}
4842 @cindex @code{cfi_sections} directive
4843 @code{.cfi_sections} may be used to specify whether CFI directives
4844 should emit @code{.eh_frame} section and/or @code{.debug_frame} section.
4845 If @var{section_list} is @code{.eh_frame}, @code{.eh_frame} is emitted,
4846 if @var{section_list} is @code{.debug_frame}, @code{.debug_frame} is emitted.
4847 To emit both use @code{.eh_frame, .debug_frame}. The default if this
4848 directive is not used is @code{.cfi_sections .eh_frame}.
4849
4850 On targets that support compact unwinding tables these can be generated
4851 by specifying @code{.eh_frame_entry} instead of @code{.eh_frame}.
4852
4853 Some targets may support an additional name, such as @code{.c6xabi.exidx}
4854 which is used by the @value{TIC6X} target.
4855
4856 The @code{.cfi_sections} directive can be repeated, with the same or different
4857 arguments, provided that CFI generation has not yet started. Once CFI
4858 generation has started however the section list is fixed and any attempts to
4859 redefine it will result in an error.
4860
4861 @subsection @code{.cfi_startproc [simple]}
4862 @cindex @code{cfi_startproc} directive
4863 @code{.cfi_startproc} is used at the beginning of each function that
4864 should have an entry in @code{.eh_frame}. It initializes some internal
4865 data structures. Don't forget to close the function by
4866 @code{.cfi_endproc}.
4867
4868 Unless @code{.cfi_startproc} is used along with parameter @code{simple}
4869 it also emits some architecture dependent initial CFI instructions.
4870
4871 @subsection @code{.cfi_endproc}
4872 @cindex @code{cfi_endproc} directive
4873 @code{.cfi_endproc} is used at the end of a function where it closes its
4874 unwind entry previously opened by
4875 @code{.cfi_startproc}, and emits it to @code{.eh_frame}.
4876
4877 @subsection @code{.cfi_personality @var{encoding} [, @var{exp}]}
4878 @cindex @code{cfi_personality} directive
4879 @code{.cfi_personality} defines personality routine and its encoding.
4880 @var{encoding} must be a constant determining how the personality
4881 should be encoded. If it is 255 (@code{DW_EH_PE_omit}), second
4882 argument is not present, otherwise second argument should be
4883 a constant or a symbol name. When using indirect encodings,
4884 the symbol provided should be the location where personality
4885 can be loaded from, not the personality routine itself.
4886 The default after @code{.cfi_startproc} is @code{.cfi_personality 0xff},
4887 no personality routine.
4888
4889 @subsection @code{.cfi_personality_id @var{id}}
4890 @cindex @code{cfi_personality_id} directive
4891 @code{cfi_personality_id} defines a personality routine by its index as
4892 defined in a compact unwinding format.
4893 Only valid when generating compact EH frames (i.e.
4894 with @code{.cfi_sections eh_frame_entry}.
4895
4896 @subsection @code{.cfi_fde_data [@var{opcode1} [, @dots{}]]}
4897 @cindex @code{cfi_fde_data} directive
4898 @code{cfi_fde_data} is used to describe the compact unwind opcodes to be
4899 used for the current function. These are emitted inline in the
4900 @code{.eh_frame_entry} section if small enough and there is no LSDA, or
4901 in the @code{.gnu.extab} section otherwise.
4902 Only valid when generating compact EH frames (i.e.
4903 with @code{.cfi_sections eh_frame_entry}.
4904
4905 @subsection @code{.cfi_lsda @var{encoding} [, @var{exp}]}
4906 @code{.cfi_lsda} defines LSDA and its encoding.
4907 @var{encoding} must be a constant determining how the LSDA
4908 should be encoded. If it is 255 (@code{DW_EH_PE_omit}), the second
4909 argument is not present, otherwise the second argument should be a constant
4910 or a symbol name. The default after @code{.cfi_startproc} is @code{.cfi_lsda 0xff},
4911 meaning that no LSDA is present.
4912
4913 @subsection @code{.cfi_inline_lsda} [@var{align}]
4914 @code{.cfi_inline_lsda} marks the start of a LSDA data section and
4915 switches to the corresponding @code{.gnu.extab} section.
4916 Must be preceded by a CFI block containing a @code{.cfi_lsda} directive.
4917 Only valid when generating compact EH frames (i.e.
4918 with @code{.cfi_sections eh_frame_entry}.
4919
4920 The table header and unwinding opcodes will be generated at this point,
4921 so that they are immediately followed by the LSDA data. The symbol
4922 referenced by the @code{.cfi_lsda} directive should still be defined
4923 in case a fallback FDE based encoding is used. The LSDA data is terminated
4924 by a section directive.
4925
4926 The optional @var{align} argument specifies the alignment required.
4927 The alignment is specified as a power of two, as with the
4928 @code{.p2align} directive.
4929
4930 @subsection @code{.cfi_def_cfa @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4931 @code{.cfi_def_cfa} defines a rule for computing CFA as: @i{take
4932 address from @var{register} and add @var{offset} to it}.
4933
4934 @subsection @code{.cfi_def_cfa_register @var{register}}
4935 @code{.cfi_def_cfa_register} modifies a rule for computing CFA. From
4936 now on @var{register} will be used instead of the old one. Offset
4937 remains the same.
4938
4939 @subsection @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset @var{offset}}
4940 @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset} modifies a rule for computing CFA. Register
4941 remains the same, but @var{offset} is new. Note that it is the
4942 absolute offset that will be added to a defined register to compute
4943 CFA address.
4944
4945 @subsection @code{.cfi_adjust_cfa_offset @var{offset}}
4946 Same as @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset} but @var{offset} is a relative
4947 value that is added/subtracted from the previous offset.
4948
4949 @subsection @code{.cfi_offset @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4950 Previous value of @var{register} is saved at offset @var{offset} from
4951 CFA.
4952
4953 @subsection @code{.cfi_val_offset @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4954 Previous value of @var{register} is CFA + @var{offset}.
4955
4956 @subsection @code{.cfi_rel_offset @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4957 Previous value of @var{register} is saved at offset @var{offset} from
4958 the current CFA register. This is transformed to @code{.cfi_offset}
4959 using the known displacement of the CFA register from the CFA.
4960 This is often easier to use, because the number will match the
4961 code it's annotating.
4962
4963 @subsection @code{.cfi_register @var{register1}, @var{register2}}
4964 Previous value of @var{register1} is saved in register @var{register2}.
4965
4966 @subsection @code{.cfi_restore @var{register}}
4967 @code{.cfi_restore} says that the rule for @var{register} is now the
4968 same as it was at the beginning of the function, after all initial
4969 instruction added by @code{.cfi_startproc} were executed.
4970
4971 @subsection @code{.cfi_undefined @var{register}}
4972 From now on the previous value of @var{register} can't be restored anymore.
4973
4974 @subsection @code{.cfi_same_value @var{register}}
4975 Current value of @var{register} is the same like in the previous frame,
4976 i.e. no restoration needed.
4977
4978 @subsection @code{.cfi_remember_state} and @code{.cfi_restore_state}
4979 @code{.cfi_remember_state} pushes the set of rules for every register onto an
4980 implicit stack, while @code{.cfi_restore_state} pops them off the stack and
4981 places them in the current row. This is useful for situations where you have
4982 multiple @code{.cfi_*} directives that need to be undone due to the control
4983 flow of the program. For example, we could have something like this (assuming
4984 the CFA is the value of @code{rbp}):
4985
4986 @smallexample
4987 je label
4988 popq %rbx
4989 .cfi_restore %rbx
4990 popq %r12
4991 .cfi_restore %r12
4992 popq %rbp
4993 .cfi_restore %rbp
4994 .cfi_def_cfa %rsp, 8
4995 ret
4996 label:
4997 /* Do something else */
4998 @end smallexample
4999
5000 Here, we want the @code{.cfi} directives to affect only the rows corresponding
5001 to the instructions before @code{label}. This means we'd have to add multiple
5002 @code{.cfi} directives after @code{label} to recreate the original save
5003 locations of the registers, as well as setting the CFA back to the value of
5004 @code{rbp}. This would be clumsy, and result in a larger binary size. Instead,
5005 we can write:
5006
5007 @smallexample
5008 je label
5009 popq %rbx
5010 .cfi_remember_state
5011 .cfi_restore %rbx
5012 popq %r12
5013 .cfi_restore %r12
5014 popq %rbp
5015 .cfi_restore %rbp
5016 .cfi_def_cfa %rsp, 8
5017 ret
5018 label:
5019 .cfi_restore_state
5020 /* Do something else */
5021 @end smallexample
5022
5023 That way, the rules for the instructions after @code{label} will be the same
5024 as before the first @code{.cfi_restore} without having to use multiple
5025 @code{.cfi} directives.
5026
5027 @subsection @code{.cfi_return_column @var{register}}
5028 Change return column @var{register}, i.e. the return address is either
5029 directly in @var{register} or can be accessed by rules for @var{register}.
5030
5031 @subsection @code{.cfi_signal_frame}
5032 Mark current function as signal trampoline.
5033
5034 @subsection @code{.cfi_window_save}
5035 SPARC register window has been saved.
5036
5037 @subsection @code{.cfi_escape} @var{expression}[, @dots{}]
5038 Allows the user to add arbitrary bytes to the unwind info. One
5039 might use this to add OS-specific CFI opcodes, or generic CFI
5040 opcodes that GAS does not yet support.
5041
5042 @subsection @code{.cfi_val_encoded_addr @var{register}, @var{encoding}, @var{label}}
5043 The current value of @var{register} is @var{label}. The value of @var{label}
5044 will be encoded in the output file according to @var{encoding}; see the
5045 description of @code{.cfi_personality} for details on this encoding.
5046
5047 The usefulness of equating a register to a fixed label is probably
5048 limited to the return address register. Here, it can be useful to
5049 mark a code segment that has only one return address which is reached
5050 by a direct branch and no copy of the return address exists in memory
5051 or another register.
5052
5053 @node Comm
5054 @section @code{.comm @var{symbol} , @var{length} }
5055
5056 @cindex @code{comm} directive
5057 @cindex symbol, common
5058 @code{.comm} declares a common symbol named @var{symbol}. When linking, a
5059 common symbol in one object file may be merged with a defined or common symbol
5060 of the same name in another object file. If @code{@value{LD}} does not see a
5061 definition for the symbol--just one or more common symbols--then it will
5062 allocate @var{length} bytes of uninitialized memory. @var{length} must be an
5063 absolute expression. If @code{@value{LD}} sees multiple common symbols with
5064 the same name, and they do not all have the same size, it will allocate space
5065 using the largest size.
5066
5067 @ifset COFF-ELF
5068 When using ELF or (as a GNU extension) PE, the @code{.comm} directive takes
5069 an optional third argument. This is the desired alignment of the symbol,
5070 specified for ELF as a byte boundary (for example, an alignment of 16 means
5071 that the least significant 4 bits of the address should be zero), and for PE
5072 as a power of two (for example, an alignment of 5 means aligned to a 32-byte
5073 boundary). The alignment must be an absolute expression, and it must be a
5074 power of two. If @code{@value{LD}} allocates uninitialized memory for the
5075 common symbol, it will use the alignment when placing the symbol. If no
5076 alignment is specified, @command{@value{AS}} will set the alignment to the
5077 largest power of two less than or equal to the size of the symbol, up to a
5078 maximum of 16 on ELF, or the default section alignment of 4 on PE@footnote{This
5079 is not the same as the executable image file alignment controlled by @code{@value{LD}}'s
5080 @samp{--section-alignment} option; image file sections in PE are aligned to
5081 multiples of 4096, which is far too large an alignment for ordinary variables.
5082 It is rather the default alignment for (non-debug) sections within object
5083 (@samp{*.o}) files, which are less strictly aligned.}.
5084 @end ifset
5085
5086 @ifset HPPA
5087 The syntax for @code{.comm} differs slightly on the HPPA. The syntax is
5088 @samp{@var{symbol} .comm, @var{length}}; @var{symbol} is optional.
5089 @end ifset
5090
5091 @node Data
5092 @section @code{.data @var{subsection}}
5093 @cindex @code{data} directive
5094
5095 @code{.data} tells @command{@value{AS}} to assemble the following statements onto the
5096 end of the data subsection numbered @var{subsection} (which is an
5097 absolute expression). If @var{subsection} is omitted, it defaults
5098 to zero.
5099
5100 @node Dc
5101 @section @code{.dc[@var{size}] @var{expressions}}
5102 @cindex @code{dc} directive
5103
5104 The @code{.dc} directive expects zero or more @var{expressions} separated by
5105 commas. These expressions are evaluated and their values inserted into the
5106 current section. The size of the emitted value depends upon the suffix to the
5107 @code{.dc} directive:
5108
5109 @table @code
5110 @item @samp{.a}
5111 Emits N-bit values, where N is the size of an address on the target system.
5112 @item @samp{.b}
5113 Emits 8-bit values.
5114 @item @samp{.d}
5115 Emits double precision floating-point values.
5116 @item @samp{.l}
5117 Emits 32-bit values.
5118 @item @samp{.s}
5119 Emits single precision floating-point values.
5120 @item @samp{.w}
5121 Emits 16-bit values.
5122 Note - this is true even on targets where the @code{.word} directive would emit
5123 32-bit values.
5124 @item @samp{.x}
5125 Emits long double precision floating-point values.
5126 @end table
5127
5128 If no suffix is used then @samp{.w} is assumed.
5129
5130 The byte ordering is target dependent, as is the size and format of floating
5131 point values.
5132
5133 @node Dcb
5134 @section @code{.dcb[@var{size}] @var{number} [,@var{fill}]}
5135 @cindex @code{dcb} directive
5136 This directive emits @var{number} copies of @var{fill}, each of @var{size}
5137 bytes. Both @var{number} and @var{fill} are absolute expressions. If the
5138 comma and @var{fill} are omitted, @var{fill} is assumed to be zero. The
5139 @var{size} suffix, if present, must be one of:
5140
5141 @table @code
5142 @item @samp{.b}
5143 Emits single byte values.
5144 @item @samp{.d}
5145 Emits double-precision floating point values.
5146 @item @samp{.l}
5147 Emits 4-byte values.
5148 @item @samp{.s}
5149 Emits single-precision floating point values.
5150 @item @samp{.w}
5151 Emits 2-byte values.
5152 @item @samp{.x}
5153 Emits long double-precision floating point values.
5154 @end table
5155
5156 If the @var{size} suffix is omitted then @samp{.w} is assumed.
5157
5158 The byte ordering is target dependent, as is the size and format of floating
5159 point values.
5160
5161 @node Ds
5162 @section @code{.ds[@var{size}] @var{number} [,@var{fill}]}
5163 @cindex @code{ds} directive
5164 This directive emits @var{number} copies of @var{fill}, each of @var{size}
5165 bytes. Both @var{number} and @var{fill} are absolute expressions. If the
5166 comma and @var{fill} are omitted, @var{fill} is assumed to be zero. The
5167 @var{size} suffix, if present, must be one of:
5168
5169 @table @code
5170 @item @samp{.b}
5171 Emits single byte values.
5172 @item @samp{.d}
5173 Emits 8-byte values.
5174 @item @samp{.l}
5175 Emits 4-byte values.
5176 @item @samp{.p}
5177 Emits values with size matching packed-decimal floating-point ones.
5178 @item @samp{.s}
5179 Emits 4-byte values.
5180 @item @samp{.w}
5181 Emits 2-byte values.
5182 @item @samp{.x}
5183 Emits values with size matching long double precision floating-point ones.
5184 @end table
5185
5186 Note - unlike the @code{.dcb} directive the @samp{.d}, @samp{.s} and @samp{.x}
5187 suffixes do not indicate that floating-point values are to be inserted.
5188
5189 If the @var{size} suffix is omitted then @samp{.w} is assumed.
5190
5191 The byte ordering is target dependent.
5192
5193
5194 @ifset COFF
5195 @node Def
5196 @section @code{.def @var{name}}
5197
5198 @cindex @code{def} directive
5199 @cindex COFF symbols, debugging
5200 @cindex debugging COFF symbols
5201 Begin defining debugging information for a symbol @var{name}; the
5202 definition extends until the @code{.endef} directive is encountered.
5203 @end ifset
5204
5205 @ifset aout
5206 @node Desc
5207 @section @code{.desc @var{symbol}, @var{abs-expression}}
5208
5209 @cindex @code{desc} directive
5210 @cindex COFF symbol descriptor
5211 @cindex symbol descriptor, COFF
5212 This directive sets the descriptor of the symbol (@pxref{Symbol Attributes})
5213 to the low 16 bits of an absolute expression.
5214
5215 @ifset COFF
5216 The @samp{.desc} directive is not available when @command{@value{AS}} is
5217 configured for COFF output; it is only for @code{a.out} or @code{b.out}
5218 object format. For the sake of compatibility, @command{@value{AS}} accepts
5219 it, but produces no output, when configured for COFF.
5220 @end ifset
5221 @end ifset
5222
5223 @ifset COFF
5224 @node Dim
5225 @section @code{.dim}
5226
5227 @cindex @code{dim} directive
5228 @cindex COFF auxiliary symbol information
5229 @cindex auxiliary symbol information, COFF
5230 This directive is generated by compilers to include auxiliary debugging
5231 information in the symbol table. It is only permitted inside
5232 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs.
5233 @end ifset
5234
5235 @node Double
5236 @section @code{.double @var{flonums}}
5237
5238 @cindex @code{double} directive
5239 @cindex floating point numbers (double)
5240 @code{.double} expects zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It
5241 assembles floating point numbers.
5242 @ifset GENERIC
5243 The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
5244 @command{@value{AS}} is configured. @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
5245 @end ifset
5246 @ifclear GENERIC
5247 @ifset IEEEFLOAT
5248 On the @value{TARGET} family @samp{.double} emits 64-bit floating-point numbers
5249 in @sc{ieee} format.
5250 @end ifset
5251 @end ifclear
5252
5253 @node Eject
5254 @section @code{.eject}
5255
5256 @cindex @code{eject} directive
5257 @cindex new page, in listings
5258 @cindex page, in listings
5259 @cindex listing control: new page
5260 Force a page break at this point, when generating assembly listings.
5261
5262 @node Else
5263 @section @code{.else}
5264
5265 @cindex @code{else} directive
5266 @code{.else} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional
5267 assembly; see @ref{If,,@code{.if}}. It marks the beginning of a section
5268 of code to be assembled if the condition for the preceding @code{.if}
5269 was false.
5270
5271 @node Elseif
5272 @section @code{.elseif}
5273
5274 @cindex @code{elseif} directive
5275 @code{.elseif} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional
5276 assembly; see @ref{If,,@code{.if}}. It is shorthand for beginning a new
5277 @code{.if} block that would otherwise fill the entire @code{.else} section.
5278
5279 @node End
5280 @section @code{.end}
5281
5282 @cindex @code{end} directive
5283 @code{.end} marks the end of the assembly file. @command{@value{AS}} does not
5284 process anything in the file past the @code{.end} directive.
5285
5286 @ifset COFF
5287 @node Endef
5288 @section @code{.endef}
5289
5290 @cindex @code{endef} directive
5291 This directive flags the end of a symbol definition begun with
5292 @code{.def}.
5293 @end ifset
5294
5295 @node Endfunc
5296 @section @code{.endfunc}
5297 @cindex @code{endfunc} directive
5298 @code{.endfunc} marks the end of a function specified with @code{.func}.
5299
5300 @node Endif
5301 @section @code{.endif}
5302
5303 @cindex @code{endif} directive
5304 @code{.endif} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional assembly;
5305 it marks the end of a block of code that is only assembled
5306 conditionally. @xref{If,,@code{.if}}.
5307
5308 @node Equ
5309 @section @code{.equ @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
5310
5311 @cindex @code{equ} directive
5312 @cindex assigning values to symbols
5313 @cindex symbols, assigning values to
5314 This directive sets the value of @var{symbol} to @var{expression}.
5315 It is synonymous with @samp{.set}; see @ref{Set,,@code{.set}}.
5316
5317 @ifset HPPA
5318 The syntax for @code{equ} on the HPPA is
5319 @samp{@var{symbol} .equ @var{expression}}.
5320 @end ifset
5321
5322 @ifset Z80
5323 The syntax for @code{equ} on the Z80 is
5324 @samp{@var{symbol} equ @var{expression}}.
5325 On the Z80 it is an error if @var{symbol} is already defined,
5326 but the symbol is not protected from later redefinition.
5327 Compare @ref{Equiv}.
5328 @end ifset
5329
5330 @node Equiv
5331 @section @code{.equiv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
5332 @cindex @code{equiv} directive
5333 The @code{.equiv} directive is like @code{.equ} and @code{.set}, except that
5334 the assembler will signal an error if @var{symbol} is already defined. Note a
5335 symbol which has been referenced but not actually defined is considered to be
5336 undefined.
5337
5338 Except for the contents of the error message, this is roughly equivalent to
5339 @smallexample
5340 .ifdef SYM
5341 .err
5342 .endif
5343 .equ SYM,VAL
5344 @end smallexample
5345 plus it protects the symbol from later redefinition.
5346
5347 @node Eqv
5348 @section @code{.eqv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
5349 @cindex @code{eqv} directive
5350 The @code{.eqv} directive is like @code{.equiv}, but no attempt is made to
5351 evaluate the expression or any part of it immediately. Instead each time
5352 the resulting symbol is used in an expression, a snapshot of its current
5353 value is taken.
5354
5355 @node Err
5356 @section @code{.err}
5357 @cindex @code{err} directive
5358 If @command{@value{AS}} assembles a @code{.err} directive, it will print an error
5359 message and, unless the @option{-Z} option was used, it will not generate an
5360 object file. This can be used to signal an error in conditionally compiled code.
5361
5362 @node Error
5363 @section @code{.error "@var{string}"}
5364 @cindex error directive
5365
5366 Similarly to @code{.err}, this directive emits an error, but you can specify a
5367 string that will be emitted as the error message. If you don't specify the
5368 message, it defaults to @code{".error directive invoked in source file"}.
5369 @xref{Errors, ,Error and Warning Messages}.
5370
5371 @smallexample
5372 .error "This code has not been assembled and tested."
5373 @end smallexample
5374
5375 @node Exitm
5376 @section @code{.exitm}
5377 Exit early from the current macro definition. @xref{Macro}.
5378
5379 @node Extern
5380 @section @code{.extern}
5381
5382 @cindex @code{extern} directive
5383 @code{.extern} is accepted in the source program---for compatibility
5384 with other assemblers---but it is ignored. @command{@value{AS}} treats
5385 all undefined symbols as external.
5386
5387 @node Fail
5388 @section @code{.fail @var{expression}}
5389
5390 @cindex @code{fail} directive
5391 Generates an error or a warning. If the value of the @var{expression} is 500
5392 or more, @command{@value{AS}} will print a warning message. If the value is less
5393 than 500, @command{@value{AS}} will print an error message. The message will
5394 include the value of @var{expression}. This can occasionally be useful inside
5395 complex nested macros or conditional assembly.
5396
5397 @node File
5398 @section @code{.file}
5399 @cindex @code{file} directive
5400
5401 @ifclear no-file-dir
5402 There are two different versions of the @code{.file} directive. Targets
5403 that support DWARF2 line number information use the DWARF2 version of
5404 @code{.file}. Other targets use the default version.
5405
5406 @subheading Default Version
5407
5408 @cindex logical file name
5409 @cindex file name, logical
5410 This version of the @code{.file} directive tells @command{@value{AS}} that we
5411 are about to start a new logical file. The syntax is:
5412
5413 @smallexample
5414 .file @var{string}
5415 @end smallexample
5416
5417 @var{string} is the new file name. In general, the filename is
5418 recognized whether or not it is surrounded by quotes @samp{"}; but if you wish
5419 to specify an empty file name, you must give the quotes--@code{""}. This
5420 statement may go away in future: it is only recognized to be compatible with
5421 old @command{@value{AS}} programs.
5422
5423 @subheading DWARF2 Version
5424 @end ifclear
5425
5426 When emitting DWARF2 line number information, @code{.file} assigns filenames
5427 to the @code{.debug_line} file name table. The syntax is:
5428
5429 @smallexample
5430 .file @var{fileno} @var{filename}
5431 @end smallexample
5432
5433 The @var{fileno} operand should be a unique positive integer to use as the
5434 index of the entry in the table. The @var{filename} operand is a C string
5435 literal enclosed in double quotes. The @var{filename} can include directory
5436 elements. If it does, then the directory will be added to the directory table
5437 and the basename will be added to the file table.
5438
5439 The detail of filename indices is exposed to the user because the filename
5440 table is shared with the @code{.debug_info} section of the DWARF2 debugging
5441 information, and thus the user must know the exact indices that table
5442 entries will have.
5443
5444 If DWARF5 support has been enabled via the @option{-gdwarf-5} option then
5445 an extended version of @code{.file} is also allowed:
5446
5447 @smallexample
5448 .file @var{fileno} [@var{dirname}] @var{filename} [md5 @var{value}]
5449 @end smallexample
5450
5451 With this version a separate directory name is allowed, although if this is
5452 used then @var{filename} should not contain any directory component, except
5453 for @var{fileno} equal to 0: in this case, @var{dirname} is expected to be
5454 the current directory and @var{filename} the currently processed file, and
5455 the latter need not be located in the former. In addtion an MD5 hash value
5456 of the contents of @var{filename} can be provided. This will be stored in
5457 the the file table as well, and can be used by tools reading the debug
5458 information to verify that the contents of the source file match the
5459 contents of the compiled file.
5460
5461 @node Fill
5462 @section @code{.fill @var{repeat} , @var{size} , @var{value}}
5463
5464 @cindex @code{fill} directive
5465 @cindex writing patterns in memory
5466 @cindex patterns, writing in memory
5467 @var{repeat}, @var{size} and @var{value} are absolute expressions.
5468 This emits @var{repeat} copies of @var{size} bytes. @var{Repeat}
5469 may be zero or more. @var{Size} may be zero or more, but if it is
5470 more than 8, then it is deemed to have the value 8, compatible with
5471 other people's assemblers. The contents of each @var{repeat} bytes
5472 is taken from an 8-byte number. The highest order 4 bytes are
5473 zero. The lowest order 4 bytes are @var{value} rendered in the
5474 byte-order of an integer on the computer @command{@value{AS}} is assembling for.
5475 Each @var{size} bytes in a repetition is taken from the lowest order
5476 @var{size} bytes of this number. Again, this bizarre behavior is
5477 compatible with other people's assemblers.
5478
5479 @var{size} and @var{value} are optional.
5480 If the second comma and @var{value} are absent, @var{value} is
5481 assumed zero. If the first comma and following tokens are absent,
5482 @var{size} is assumed to be 1.
5483
5484 @node Float
5485 @section @code{.float @var{flonums}}
5486
5487 @cindex floating point numbers (single)
5488 @cindex @code{float} directive
5489 This directive assembles zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It
5490 has the same effect as @code{.single}.
5491 @ifset GENERIC
5492 The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
5493 @command{@value{AS}} is configured.
5494 @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
5495 @end ifset
5496 @ifclear GENERIC
5497 @ifset IEEEFLOAT
5498 On the @value{TARGET} family, @code{.float} emits 32-bit floating point numbers
5499 in @sc{ieee} format.
5500 @end ifset
5501 @end ifclear
5502
5503 @node Func
5504 @section @code{.func @var{name}[,@var{label}]}
5505 @cindex @code{func} directive
5506 @code{.func} emits debugging information to denote function @var{name}, and
5507 is ignored unless the file is assembled with debugging enabled.
5508 Only @samp{--gstabs[+]} is currently supported.
5509 @var{label} is the entry point of the function and if omitted @var{name}
5510 prepended with the @samp{leading char} is used.
5511 @samp{leading char} is usually @code{_} or nothing, depending on the target.
5512 All functions are currently defined to have @code{void} return type.
5513 The function must be terminated with @code{.endfunc}.
5514
5515 @node Global
5516 @section @code{.global @var{symbol}}, @code{.globl @var{symbol}}
5517
5518 @cindex @code{global} directive
5519 @cindex symbol, making visible to linker
5520 @code{.global} makes the symbol visible to @code{@value{LD}}. If you define
5521 @var{symbol} in your partial program, its value is made available to
5522 other partial programs that are linked with it. Otherwise,
5523 @var{symbol} takes its attributes from a symbol of the same name
5524 from another file linked into the same program.
5525
5526 Both spellings (@samp{.globl} and @samp{.global}) are accepted, for
5527 compatibility with other assemblers.
5528
5529 @ifset HPPA
5530 On the HPPA, @code{.global} is not always enough to make it accessible to other
5531 partial programs. You may need the HPPA-only @code{.EXPORT} directive as well.
5532 @xref{HPPA Directives, ,HPPA Assembler Directives}.
5533 @end ifset
5534
5535 @ifset ELF
5536 @node Gnu_attribute
5537 @section @code{.gnu_attribute @var{tag},@var{value}}
5538 Record a @sc{gnu} object attribute for this file. @xref{Object Attributes}.
5539
5540 @node Hidden
5541 @section @code{.hidden @var{names}}
5542
5543 @cindex @code{hidden} directive
5544 @cindex visibility
5545 This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are
5546 @code{.internal} (@pxref{Internal,,@code{.internal}}) and
5547 @code{.protected} (@pxref{Protected,,@code{.protected}}).
5548
5549 This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
5550 their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to
5551 @code{hidden} which means that the symbols are not visible to other components.
5552 Such symbols are always considered to be @code{protected} as well.
5553 @end ifset
5554
5555 @node hword
5556 @section @code{.hword @var{expressions}}
5557
5558 @cindex @code{hword} directive
5559 @cindex integers, 16-bit
5560 @cindex numbers, 16-bit
5561 @cindex sixteen bit integers
5562 This expects zero or more @var{expressions}, and emits
5563 a 16 bit number for each.
5564
5565 @ifset GENERIC
5566 This directive is a synonym for @samp{.short}; depending on the target
5567 architecture, it may also be a synonym for @samp{.word}.
5568 @end ifset
5569 @ifclear GENERIC
5570 @ifset W32
5571 This directive is a synonym for @samp{.short}.
5572 @end ifset
5573 @ifset W16
5574 This directive is a synonym for both @samp{.short} and @samp{.word}.
5575 @end ifset
5576 @end ifclear
5577
5578 @node Ident
5579 @section @code{.ident}
5580
5581 @cindex @code{ident} directive
5582
5583 This directive is used by some assemblers to place tags in object files. The
5584 behavior of this directive varies depending on the target. When using the
5585 a.out object file format, @command{@value{AS}} simply accepts the directive for
5586 source-file compatibility with existing assemblers, but does not emit anything
5587 for it. When using COFF, comments are emitted to the @code{.comment} or
5588 @code{.rdata} section, depending on the target. When using ELF, comments are
5589 emitted to the @code{.comment} section.
5590
5591 @node If
5592 @section @code{.if @var{absolute expression}}
5593
5594 @cindex conditional assembly
5595 @cindex @code{if} directive
5596 @code{.if} marks the beginning of a section of code which is only
5597 considered part of the source program being assembled if the argument
5598 (which must be an @var{absolute expression}) is non-zero. The end of
5599 the conditional section of code must be marked by @code{.endif}
5600 (@pxref{Endif,,@code{.endif}}); optionally, you may include code for the
5601 alternative condition, flagged by @code{.else} (@pxref{Else,,@code{.else}}).
5602 If you have several conditions to check, @code{.elseif} may be used to avoid
5603 nesting blocks if/else within each subsequent @code{.else} block.
5604
5605 The following variants of @code{.if} are also supported:
5606 @table @code
5607 @cindex @code{ifdef} directive
5608 @item .ifdef @var{symbol}
5609 Assembles the following section of code if the specified @var{symbol}
5610 has been defined. Note a symbol which has been referenced but not yet defined
5611 is considered to be undefined.
5612
5613 @cindex @code{ifb} directive
5614 @item .ifb @var{text}
5615 Assembles the following section of code if the operand is blank (empty).
5616
5617 @cindex @code{ifc} directive
5618 @item .ifc @var{string1},@var{string2}
5619 Assembles the following section of code if the two strings are the same. The
5620 strings may be optionally quoted with single quotes. If they are not quoted,
5621 the first string stops at the first comma, and the second string stops at the
5622 end of the line. Strings which contain whitespace should be quoted. The
5623 string comparison is case sensitive.
5624
5625 @cindex @code{ifeq} directive
5626 @item .ifeq @var{absolute expression}
5627 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is zero.
5628
5629 @cindex @code{ifeqs} directive
5630 @item .ifeqs @var{string1},@var{string2}
5631 Another form of @code{.ifc}. The strings must be quoted using double quotes.
5632
5633 @cindex @code{ifge} directive
5634 @item .ifge @var{absolute expression}
5635 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is greater than or
5636 equal to zero.
5637
5638 @cindex @code{ifgt} directive
5639 @item .ifgt @var{absolute expression}
5640 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is greater than zero.
5641
5642 @cindex @code{ifle} directive
5643 @item .ifle @var{absolute expression}
5644 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is less than or equal
5645 to zero.
5646
5647 @cindex @code{iflt} directive
5648 @item .iflt @var{absolute expression}
5649 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is less than zero.
5650
5651 @cindex @code{ifnb} directive
5652 @item .ifnb @var{text}
5653 Like @code{.ifb}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
5654 following section of code if the operand is non-blank (non-empty).
5655
5656 @cindex @code{ifnc} directive
5657 @item .ifnc @var{string1},@var{string2}.
5658 Like @code{.ifc}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
5659 following section of code if the two strings are not the same.
5660
5661 @cindex @code{ifndef} directive
5662 @cindex @code{ifnotdef} directive
5663 @item .ifndef @var{symbol}
5664 @itemx .ifnotdef @var{symbol}
5665 Assembles the following section of code if the specified @var{symbol}
5666 has not been defined. Both spelling variants are equivalent. Note a symbol
5667 which has been referenced but not yet defined is considered to be undefined.
5668
5669 @cindex @code{ifne} directive
5670 @item .ifne @var{absolute expression}
5671 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is not equal to zero
5672 (in other words, this is equivalent to @code{.if}).
5673
5674 @cindex @code{ifnes} directive
5675 @item .ifnes @var{string1},@var{string2}
5676 Like @code{.ifeqs}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
5677 following section of code if the two strings are not the same.
5678 @end table
5679
5680 @node Incbin
5681 @section @code{.incbin "@var{file}"[,@var{skip}[,@var{count}]]}
5682
5683 @cindex @code{incbin} directive
5684 @cindex binary files, including
5685 The @code{incbin} directive includes @var{file} verbatim at the current
5686 location. You can control the search paths used with the @samp{-I} command-line
5687 option (@pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}). Quotation marks are required
5688 around @var{file}.
5689
5690 The @var{skip} argument skips a number of bytes from the start of the
5691 @var{file}. The @var{count} argument indicates the maximum number of bytes to
5692 read. Note that the data is not aligned in any way, so it is the user's
5693 responsibility to make sure that proper alignment is provided both before and
5694 after the @code{incbin} directive.
5695
5696 @node Include
5697 @section @code{.include "@var{file}"}
5698
5699 @cindex @code{include} directive
5700 @cindex supporting files, including
5701 @cindex files, including
5702 This directive provides a way to include supporting files at specified
5703 points in your source program. The code from @var{file} is assembled as
5704 if it followed the point of the @code{.include}; when the end of the
5705 included file is reached, assembly of the original file continues. You
5706 can control the search paths used with the @samp{-I} command-line option
5707 (@pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}). Quotation marks are required
5708 around @var{file}.
5709
5710 @node Int
5711 @section @code{.int @var{expressions}}
5712
5713 @cindex @code{int} directive
5714 @cindex integers, 32-bit
5715 Expect zero or more @var{expressions}, of any section, separated by commas.
5716 For each expression, emit a number that, at run time, is the value of that
5717 expression. The byte order and bit size of the number depends on what kind
5718 of target the assembly is for.
5719
5720 @ifclear GENERIC
5721 @ifset H8
5722 On most forms of the H8/300, @code{.int} emits 16-bit
5723 integers. On the H8/300H and the Renesas SH, however, @code{.int} emits
5724 32-bit integers.
5725 @end ifset
5726 @end ifclear
5727
5728 @ifset ELF
5729 @node Internal
5730 @section @code{.internal @var{names}}
5731
5732 @cindex @code{internal} directive
5733 @cindex visibility
5734 This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are
5735 @code{.hidden} (@pxref{Hidden,,@code{.hidden}}) and
5736 @code{.protected} (@pxref{Protected,,@code{.protected}}).
5737
5738 This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
5739 their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to
5740 @code{internal} which means that the symbols are considered to be @code{hidden}
5741 (i.e., not visible to other components), and that some extra, processor specific
5742 processing must also be performed upon the symbols as well.
5743 @end ifset
5744
5745 @node Irp
5746 @section @code{.irp @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
5747
5748 @cindex @code{irp} directive
5749 Evaluate a sequence of statements assigning different values to @var{symbol}.
5750 The sequence of statements starts at the @code{.irp} directive, and is
5751 terminated by an @code{.endr} directive. For each @var{value}, @var{symbol} is
5752 set to @var{value}, and the sequence of statements is assembled. If no
5753 @var{value} is listed, the sequence of statements is assembled once, with
5754 @var{symbol} set to the null string. To refer to @var{symbol} within the
5755 sequence of statements, use @var{\symbol}.
5756
5757 For example, assembling
5758
5759 @example
5760 .irp param,1,2,3
5761 move d\param,sp@@-
5762 .endr
5763 @end example
5764
5765 is equivalent to assembling
5766
5767 @example
5768 move d1,sp@@-
5769 move d2,sp@@-
5770 move d3,sp@@-
5771 @end example
5772
5773 For some caveats with the spelling of @var{symbol}, see also @ref{Macro}.
5774
5775 @node Irpc
5776 @section @code{.irpc @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
5777
5778 @cindex @code{irpc} directive
5779 Evaluate a sequence of statements assigning different values to @var{symbol}.
5780 The sequence of statements starts at the @code{.irpc} directive, and is
5781 terminated by an @code{.endr} directive. For each character in @var{value},
5782 @var{symbol} is set to the character, and the sequence of statements is
5783 assembled. If no @var{value} is listed, the sequence of statements is
5784 assembled once, with @var{symbol} set to the null string. To refer to
5785 @var{symbol} within the sequence of statements, use @var{\symbol}.
5786
5787 For example, assembling
5788
5789 @example
5790 .irpc param,123
5791 move d\param,sp@@-
5792 .endr
5793 @end example
5794
5795 is equivalent to assembling
5796
5797 @example
5798 move d1,sp@@-
5799 move d2,sp@@-
5800 move d3,sp@@-
5801 @end example
5802
5803 For some caveats with the spelling of @var{symbol}, see also the discussion
5804 at @xref{Macro}.
5805
5806 @node Lcomm
5807 @section @code{.lcomm @var{symbol} , @var{length}}
5808
5809 @cindex @code{lcomm} directive
5810 @cindex local common symbols
5811 @cindex symbols, local common
5812 Reserve @var{length} (an absolute expression) bytes for a local common
5813 denoted by @var{symbol}. The section and value of @var{symbol} are
5814 those of the new local common. The addresses are allocated in the bss
5815 section, so that at run-time the bytes start off zeroed. @var{Symbol}
5816 is not declared global (@pxref{Global,,@code{.global}}), so is normally
5817 not visible to @code{@value{LD}}.
5818
5819 @ifset GENERIC
5820 Some targets permit a third argument to be used with @code{.lcomm}. This
5821 argument specifies the desired alignment of the symbol in the bss section.
5822 @end ifset
5823
5824 @ifset HPPA
5825 The syntax for @code{.lcomm} differs slightly on the HPPA. The syntax is
5826 @samp{@var{symbol} .lcomm, @var{length}}; @var{symbol} is optional.
5827 @end ifset
5828
5829 @node Lflags
5830 @section @code{.lflags}
5831
5832 @cindex @code{lflags} directive (ignored)
5833 @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive, for compatibility with other
5834 assemblers, but ignores it.
5835
5836 @ifclear no-line-dir
5837 @node Line
5838 @section @code{.line @var{line-number}}
5839
5840 @cindex @code{line} directive
5841 @cindex logical line number
5842 @ifset aout
5843 Change the logical line number. @var{line-number} must be an absolute
5844 expression. The next line has that logical line number. Therefore any other
5845 statements on the current line (after a statement separator character) are
5846 reported as on logical line number @var{line-number} @minus{} 1. One day
5847 @command{@value{AS}} will no longer support this directive: it is recognized only
5848 for compatibility with existing assembler programs.
5849 @end ifset
5850
5851 Even though this is a directive associated with the @code{a.out} or
5852 @code{b.out} object-code formats, @command{@value{AS}} still recognizes it
5853 when producing COFF output, and treats @samp{.line} as though it
5854 were the COFF @samp{.ln} @emph{if} it is found outside a
5855 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pair.
5856
5857 Inside a @code{.def}, @samp{.line} is, instead, one of the directives
5858 used by compilers to generate auxiliary symbol information for
5859 debugging.
5860 @end ifclear
5861
5862 @node Linkonce
5863 @section @code{.linkonce [@var{type}]}
5864 @cindex COMDAT
5865 @cindex @code{linkonce} directive
5866 @cindex common sections
5867 Mark the current section so that the linker only includes a single copy of it.
5868 This may be used to include the same section in several different object files,
5869 but ensure that the linker will only include it once in the final output file.
5870 The @code{.linkonce} pseudo-op must be used for each instance of the section.
5871 Duplicate sections are detected based on the section name, so it should be
5872 unique.
5873
5874 This directive is only supported by a few object file formats; as of this
5875 writing, the only object file format which supports it is the Portable
5876 Executable format used on Windows NT.
5877
5878 The @var{type} argument is optional. If specified, it must be one of the
5879 following strings. For example:
5880 @smallexample
5881 .linkonce same_size
5882 @end smallexample
5883 Not all types may be supported on all object file formats.
5884
5885 @table @code
5886 @item discard
5887 Silently discard duplicate sections. This is the default.
5888
5889 @item one_only
5890 Warn if there are duplicate sections, but still keep only one copy.
5891
5892 @item same_size
5893 Warn if any of the duplicates have different sizes.
5894
5895 @item same_contents
5896 Warn if any of the duplicates do not have exactly the same contents.
5897 @end table
5898
5899 @node List
5900 @section @code{.list}
5901
5902 @cindex @code{list} directive
5903 @cindex listing control, turning on
5904 Control (in conjunction with the @code{.nolist} directive) whether or
5905 not assembly listings are generated. These two directives maintain an
5906 internal counter (which is zero initially). @code{.list} increments the
5907 counter, and @code{.nolist} decrements it. Assembly listings are
5908 generated whenever the counter is greater than zero.
5909
5910 By default, listings are disabled. When you enable them (with the
5911 @samp{-a} command-line option; @pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}),
5912 the initial value of the listing counter is one.
5913
5914 @node Ln
5915 @section @code{.ln @var{line-number}}
5916
5917 @cindex @code{ln} directive
5918 @ifclear no-line-dir
5919 @samp{.ln} is a synonym for @samp{.line}.
5920 @end ifclear
5921 @ifset no-line-dir
5922 Tell @command{@value{AS}} to change the logical line number. @var{line-number}
5923 must be an absolute expression. The next line has that logical
5924 line number, so any other statements on the current line (after a
5925 statement separator character @code{;}) are reported as on logical
5926 line number @var{line-number} @minus{} 1.
5927 @end ifset
5928
5929 @node Loc
5930 @section @code{.loc @var{fileno} @var{lineno} [@var{column}] [@var{options}]}
5931 @cindex @code{loc} directive
5932 When emitting DWARF2 line number information,
5933 the @code{.loc} directive will add a row to the @code{.debug_line} line
5934 number matrix corresponding to the immediately following assembly
5935 instruction. The @var{fileno}, @var{lineno}, and optional @var{column}
5936 arguments will be applied to the @code{.debug_line} state machine before
5937 the row is added. It is an error for the input assembly file to generate
5938 a non-empty @code{.debug_line} and also use @code{loc} directives.
5939
5940 The @var{options} are a sequence of the following tokens in any order:
5941
5942 @table @code
5943 @item basic_block
5944 This option will set the @code{basic_block} register in the
5945 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5946
5947 @item prologue_end
5948 This option will set the @code{prologue_end} register in the
5949 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5950
5951 @item epilogue_begin
5952 This option will set the @code{epilogue_begin} register in the
5953 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5954
5955 @item is_stmt @var{value}
5956 This option will set the @code{is_stmt} register in the
5957 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{value}, which must be
5958 either 0 or 1.
5959
5960 @item isa @var{value}
5961 This directive will set the @code{isa} register in the @code{.debug_line}
5962 state machine to @var{value}, which must be an unsigned integer.
5963
5964 @item discriminator @var{value}
5965 This directive will set the @code{discriminator} register in the @code{.debug_line}
5966 state machine to @var{value}, which must be an unsigned integer.
5967
5968 @item view @var{value}
5969 This option causes a row to be added to @code{.debug_line} in reference to the
5970 current address (which might not be the same as that of the following assembly
5971 instruction), and to associate @var{value} with the @code{view} register in the
5972 @code{.debug_line} state machine. If @var{value} is a label, both the
5973 @code{view} register and the label are set to the number of prior @code{.loc}
5974 directives at the same program location. If @var{value} is the literal
5975 @code{0}, the @code{view} register is set to zero, and the assembler asserts
5976 that there aren't any prior @code{.loc} directives at the same program
5977 location. If @var{value} is the literal @code{-0}, the assembler arrange for
5978 the @code{view} register to be reset in this row, even if there are prior
5979 @code{.loc} directives at the same program location.
5980
5981 @end table
5982
5983 @node Loc_mark_labels
5984 @section @code{.loc_mark_labels @var{enable}}
5985 @cindex @code{loc_mark_labels} directive
5986 When emitting DWARF2 line number information,
5987 the @code{.loc_mark_labels} directive makes the assembler emit an entry
5988 to the @code{.debug_line} line number matrix with the @code{basic_block}
5989 register in the state machine set whenever a code label is seen.
5990 The @var{enable} argument should be either 1 or 0, to enable or disable
5991 this function respectively.
5992
5993 @ifset ELF
5994 @node Local
5995 @section @code{.local @var{names}}
5996
5997 @cindex @code{local} directive
5998 This directive, which is available for ELF targets, marks each symbol in
5999 the comma-separated list of @code{names} as a local symbol so that it
6000 will not be externally visible. If the symbols do not already exist,
6001 they will be created.
6002
6003 For targets where the @code{.lcomm} directive (@pxref{Lcomm}) does not
6004 accept an alignment argument, which is the case for most ELF targets,
6005 the @code{.local} directive can be used in combination with @code{.comm}
6006 (@pxref{Comm}) to define aligned local common data.
6007 @end ifset
6008
6009 @node Long
6010 @section @code{.long @var{expressions}}
6011
6012 @cindex @code{long} directive
6013 @code{.long} is the same as @samp{.int}. @xref{Int,,@code{.int}}.
6014
6015 @ignore
6016 @c no one seems to know what this is for or whether this description is
6017 @c what it really ought to do
6018 @node Lsym
6019 @section @code{.lsym @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
6020
6021 @cindex @code{lsym} directive
6022 @cindex symbol, not referenced in assembly
6023 @code{.lsym} creates a new symbol named @var{symbol}, but does not put it in
6024 the hash table, ensuring it cannot be referenced by name during the
6025 rest of the assembly. This sets the attributes of the symbol to be
6026 the same as the expression value:
6027 @smallexample
6028 @var{other} = @var{descriptor} = 0
6029 @var{type} = @r{(section of @var{expression})}
6030 @var{value} = @var{expression}
6031 @end smallexample
6032 @noindent
6033 The new symbol is not flagged as external.
6034 @end ignore
6035
6036 @node Macro
6037 @section @code{.macro}
6038
6039 @cindex macros
6040 The commands @code{.macro} and @code{.endm} allow you to define macros that
6041 generate assembly output. For example, this definition specifies a macro
6042 @code{sum} that puts a sequence of numbers into memory:
6043
6044 @example
6045 .macro sum from=0, to=5
6046 .long \from
6047 .if \to-\from
6048 sum "(\from+1)",\to
6049 .endif
6050 .endm
6051 @end example
6052
6053 @noindent
6054 With that definition, @samp{SUM 0,5} is equivalent to this assembly input:
6055
6056 @example
6057 .long 0
6058 .long 1
6059 .long 2
6060 .long 3
6061 .long 4
6062 .long 5
6063 @end example
6064
6065 @ftable @code
6066 @item .macro @var{macname}
6067 @itemx .macro @var{macname} @var{macargs} @dots{}
6068 @cindex @code{macro} directive
6069 Begin the definition of a macro called @var{macname}. If your macro
6070 definition requires arguments, specify their names after the macro name,
6071 separated by commas or spaces. You can qualify the macro argument to
6072 indicate whether all invocations must specify a non-blank value (through
6073 @samp{:@code{req}}), or whether it takes all of the remaining arguments
6074 (through @samp{:@code{vararg}}). You can supply a default value for any
6075 macro argument by following the name with @samp{=@var{deflt}}. You
6076 cannot define two macros with the same @var{macname} unless it has been
6077 subject to the @code{.purgem} directive (@pxref{Purgem}) between the two
6078 definitions. For example, these are all valid @code{.macro} statements:
6079
6080 @table @code
6081 @item .macro comm
6082 Begin the definition of a macro called @code{comm}, which takes no
6083 arguments.
6084
6085 @item .macro plus1 p, p1
6086 @itemx .macro plus1 p p1
6087 Either statement begins the definition of a macro called @code{plus1},
6088 which takes two arguments; within the macro definition, write
6089 @samp{\p} or @samp{\p1} to evaluate the arguments.
6090
6091 @item .macro reserve_str p1=0 p2
6092 Begin the definition of a macro called @code{reserve_str}, with two
6093 arguments. The first argument has a default value, but not the second.
6094 After the definition is complete, you can call the macro either as
6095 @samp{reserve_str @var{a},@var{b}} (with @samp{\p1} evaluating to
6096 @var{a} and @samp{\p2} evaluating to @var{b}), or as @samp{reserve_str
6097 ,@var{b}} (with @samp{\p1} evaluating as the default, in this case
6098 @samp{0}, and @samp{\p2} evaluating to @var{b}).
6099
6100 @item .macro m p1:req, p2=0, p3:vararg
6101 Begin the definition of a macro called @code{m}, with at least three
6102 arguments. The first argument must always have a value specified, but
6103 not the second, which instead has a default value. The third formal
6104 will get assigned all remaining arguments specified at invocation time.
6105
6106 When you call a macro, you can specify the argument values either by
6107 position, or by keyword. For example, @samp{sum 9,17} is equivalent to
6108 @samp{sum to=17, from=9}.
6109
6110 @end table
6111
6112 Note that since each of the @var{macargs} can be an identifier exactly
6113 as any other one permitted by the target architecture, there may be
6114 occasional problems if the target hand-crafts special meanings to certain
6115 characters when they occur in a special position. For example, if the colon
6116 (@code{:}) is generally permitted to be part of a symbol name, but the
6117 architecture specific code special-cases it when occurring as the final
6118 character of a symbol (to denote a label), then the macro parameter
6119 replacement code will have no way of knowing that and consider the whole
6120 construct (including the colon) an identifier, and check only this
6121 identifier for being the subject to parameter substitution. So for example
6122 this macro definition:
6123
6124 @example
6125 .macro label l
6126 \l:
6127 .endm
6128 @end example
6129
6130 might not work as expected. Invoking @samp{label foo} might not create a label
6131 called @samp{foo} but instead just insert the text @samp{\l:} into the
6132 assembler source, probably generating an error about an unrecognised
6133 identifier.
6134
6135 Similarly problems might occur with the period character (@samp{.})
6136 which is often allowed inside opcode names (and hence identifier names). So
6137 for example constructing a macro to build an opcode from a base name and a
6138 length specifier like this:
6139
6140 @example
6141 .macro opcode base length
6142 \base.\length
6143 .endm
6144 @end example
6145
6146 and invoking it as @samp{opcode store l} will not create a @samp{store.l}
6147 instruction but instead generate some kind of error as the assembler tries to
6148 interpret the text @samp{\base.\length}.
6149
6150 There are several possible ways around this problem:
6151
6152 @table @code
6153 @item Insert white space
6154 If it is possible to use white space characters then this is the simplest
6155 solution. eg:
6156
6157 @example
6158 .macro label l
6159 \l :
6160 .endm
6161 @end example
6162
6163 @item Use @samp{\()}
6164 The string @samp{\()} can be used to separate the end of a macro argument from
6165 the following text. eg:
6166
6167 @example
6168 .macro opcode base length
6169 \base\().\length
6170 .endm
6171 @end example
6172
6173 @item Use the alternate macro syntax mode
6174 In the alternative macro syntax mode the ampersand character (@samp{&}) can be
6175 used as a separator. eg:
6176
6177 @example
6178 .altmacro
6179 .macro label l
6180 l&:
6181 .endm
6182 @end example
6183 @end table
6184
6185 Note: this problem of correctly identifying string parameters to pseudo ops
6186 also applies to the identifiers used in @code{.irp} (@pxref{Irp})
6187 and @code{.irpc} (@pxref{Irpc}) as well.
6188
6189 Another issue can occur with the actual arguments passed during macro
6190 invocation: Multiple arguments can be separated by blanks or commas. To have
6191 arguments actually contain blanks or commas (or potentially other non-alpha-
6192 numeric characters), individual arguments will need to be enclosed in either
6193 parentheses @code{()}, square brackets @code{[]}, or double quote @code{"}
6194 characters. The latter may be the only viable option in certain situations,
6195 as only double quotes are actually stripped while establishing arguments. It
6196 may be important to be aware of two escaping models used when processing such
6197 quoted argument strings: For one two adjacent double quotes represent a single
6198 double quote in the resulting argument, going along the lines of the stripping
6199 of the enclosing quotes. But then double quotes can also be escaped by a
6200 backslash @code{\}, but this backslash will not be retained in the resulting
6201 actual argument as then seen / used while expanding the macro.
6202
6203 As a consequence to the first of these escaping mechanisms two string literals
6204 intended to be representing separate macro arguments need to be separated by
6205 white space (or, better yet, by a comma). To state it differently, such
6206 adjacent string literals - even if separated only by a blank - will not be
6207 concatenated when determining macro arguments, even if they're only separated
6208 by white space. This is unlike certain other pseudo ops, e.g. @code{.ascii}.
6209
6210 @item .endm
6211 @cindex @code{endm} directive
6212 Mark the end of a macro definition.
6213
6214 @item .exitm
6215 @cindex @code{exitm} directive
6216 Exit early from the current macro definition.
6217
6218 @cindex number of macros executed
6219 @cindex macros, count executed
6220 @item \@@
6221 @command{@value{AS}} maintains a counter of how many macros it has
6222 executed in this pseudo-variable; you can copy that number to your
6223 output with @samp{\@@}, but @emph{only within a macro definition}.
6224
6225 @item LOCAL @var{name} [ , @dots{} ]
6226 @emph{Warning: @code{LOCAL} is only available if you select ``alternate
6227 macro syntax'' with @samp{--alternate} or @code{.altmacro}.}
6228 @xref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
6229 @end ftable
6230
6231 @node MRI
6232 @section @code{.mri @var{val}}
6233
6234 @cindex @code{mri} directive
6235 @cindex MRI mode, temporarily
6236 If @var{val} is non-zero, this tells @command{@value{AS}} to enter MRI mode. If
6237 @var{val} is zero, this tells @command{@value{AS}} to exit MRI mode. This change
6238 affects code assembled until the next @code{.mri} directive, or until the end
6239 of the file. @xref{M, MRI mode, MRI mode}.
6240
6241 @node Noaltmacro
6242 @section @code{.noaltmacro}
6243 Disable alternate macro mode. @xref{Altmacro}.
6244
6245 @node Nolist
6246 @section @code{.nolist}
6247
6248 @cindex @code{nolist} directive
6249 @cindex listing control, turning off
6250 Control (in conjunction with the @code{.list} directive) whether or
6251 not assembly listings are generated. These two directives maintain an
6252 internal counter (which is zero initially). @code{.list} increments the
6253 counter, and @code{.nolist} decrements it. Assembly listings are
6254 generated whenever the counter is greater than zero.
6255
6256 @node Nop
6257 @section @code{.nop [@var{size}]}
6258
6259 @cindex @code{nop} directive
6260 @cindex filling memory with no-op instructions
6261 This directive emits no-op instructions. It is provided on all architectures,
6262 allowing the creation of architecture neutral tests involving actual code. The
6263 size of the generated instruction is target specific, but if the optional
6264 @var{size} argument is given and resolves to an absolute positive value at that
6265 point in assembly (no forward expressions allowed) then the fewest no-op
6266 instructions are emitted that equal or exceed a total @var{size} in bytes.
6267 @code{.nop} does affect the generation of DWARF debug line information.
6268 Some targets do not support using @code{.nop} with @var{size}.
6269
6270 @node Nops
6271 @section @code{.nops @var{size}[, @var{control}]}
6272
6273 @cindex @code{nops} directive
6274 @cindex filling memory with no-op instructions
6275 This directive emits no-op instructions. It is specific to the Intel 80386 and
6276 AMD x86-64 targets. It takes a @var{size} argument and generates @var{size}
6277 bytes of no-op instructions. @var{size} must be absolute and positive. These
6278 bytes do not affect the generation of DWARF debug line information.
6279
6280 The optional @var{control} argument specifies a size limit for a single no-op
6281 instruction. If not provided then a value of 0 is assumed. The valid values
6282 of @var{control} are between 0 and 4 in 16-bit mode, between 0 and 7 when
6283 tuning for older processors in 32-bit mode, between 0 and 11 in 64-bit mode or
6284 when tuning for newer processors in 32-bit mode. When 0 is used, the no-op
6285 instruction size limit is set to the maximum supported size.
6286
6287 @node Octa
6288 @section @code{.octa @var{bignums}}
6289
6290 @c FIXME: double size emitted for "octa" on some? Or warn?
6291 @cindex @code{octa} directive
6292 @cindex integer, 16-byte
6293 @cindex sixteen byte integer
6294 This directive expects zero or more bignums, separated by commas. For each
6295 bignum, it emits a 16-byte integer.
6296
6297 The term ``octa'' comes from contexts in which a ``word'' is two bytes;
6298 hence @emph{octa}-word for 16 bytes.
6299
6300 @node Offset
6301 @section @code{.offset @var{loc}}
6302
6303 @cindex @code{offset} directive
6304 Set the location counter to @var{loc} in the absolute section. @var{loc} must
6305 be an absolute expression. This directive may be useful for defining
6306 symbols with absolute values. Do not confuse it with the @code{.org}
6307 directive.
6308
6309 @node Org
6310 @section @code{.org @var{new-lc} , @var{fill}}
6311
6312 @cindex @code{org} directive
6313 @cindex location counter, advancing
6314 @cindex advancing location counter
6315 @cindex current address, advancing
6316 Advance the location counter of the current section to
6317 @var{new-lc}. @var{new-lc} is either an absolute expression or an
6318 expression with the same section as the current subsection. That is,
6319 you can't use @code{.org} to cross sections: if @var{new-lc} has the
6320 wrong section, the @code{.org} directive is ignored. To be compatible
6321 with former assemblers, if the section of @var{new-lc} is absolute,
6322 @command{@value{AS}} issues a warning, then pretends the section of @var{new-lc}
6323 is the same as the current subsection.
6324
6325 @code{.org} may only increase the location counter, or leave it
6326 unchanged; you cannot use @code{.org} to move the location counter
6327 backwards.
6328
6329 @c double negative used below "not undefined" because this is a specific
6330 @c reference to "undefined" (as SEG_UNKNOWN is called in this manual)
6331 @c section. doc@cygnus.com 18feb91
6332 Because @command{@value{AS}} tries to assemble programs in one pass, @var{new-lc}
6333 may not be undefined. If you really detest this restriction we eagerly await
6334 a chance to share your improved assembler.
6335
6336 Beware that the origin is relative to the start of the section, not
6337 to the start of the subsection. This is compatible with other
6338 people's assemblers.
6339
6340 When the location counter (of the current subsection) is advanced, the
6341 intervening bytes are filled with @var{fill} which should be an
6342 absolute expression. If the comma and @var{fill} are omitted,
6343 @var{fill} defaults to zero.
6344
6345 @node P2align
6346 @section @code{.p2align[wl] [@var{abs-expr}[, @var{abs-expr}[, @var{abs-expr}]]]}
6347
6348 @cindex padding the location counter given a power of two
6349 @cindex @code{p2align} directive
6350 Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular
6351 storage boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the
6352 number of low-order zero bits the location counter must have after
6353 advancement. For example @samp{.p2align 3} advances the location
6354 counter until it is a multiple of 8. If the location counter is already a
6355 multiple of 8, no change is needed. If the expression is omitted then a
6356 default value of 0 is used, effectively disabling alignment requirements.
6357
6358 The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
6359 padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the
6360 padding bytes are normally zero. However, on most systems, if the section is
6361 marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
6362 with no-op instructions.
6363
6364 The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present,
6365 it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
6366 directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
6367 specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the
6368 fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
6369 required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
6370 with no-op instructions when appropriate.
6371
6372 @cindex @code{p2alignw} directive
6373 @cindex @code{p2alignl} directive
6374 The @code{.p2alignw} and @code{.p2alignl} directives are variants of the
6375 @code{.p2align} directive. The @code{.p2alignw} directive treats the fill
6376 pattern as a two byte word value. The @code{.p2alignl} directives treats the
6377 fill pattern as a four byte longword value. For example, @code{.p2alignw
6378 2,0x368d} will align to a multiple of 4. If it skips two bytes, they will be
6379 filled in with the value 0x368d (the exact placement of the bytes depends upon
6380 the endianness of the processor). If it skips 1 or 3 bytes, the fill value is
6381 undefined.
6382
6383 @ifset ELF
6384 @node PopSection
6385 @section @code{.popsection}
6386
6387 @cindex @code{popsection} directive
6388 @cindex Section Stack
6389 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6390 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
6391 @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}), and @code{.previous}
6392 (@pxref{Previous}).
6393
6394 This directive replaces the current section (and subsection) with the top
6395 section (and subsection) on the section stack. This section is popped off the
6396 stack.
6397 @end ifset
6398
6399 @ifset ELF
6400 @node Previous
6401 @section @code{.previous}
6402
6403 @cindex @code{previous} directive
6404 @cindex Section Stack
6405 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6406 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
6407 @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}), and @code{.popsection}
6408 (@pxref{PopSection}).
6409
6410 This directive swaps the current section (and subsection) with most recently
6411 referenced section/subsection pair prior to this one. Multiple
6412 @code{.previous} directives in a row will flip between two sections (and their
6413 subsections). For example:
6414
6415 @smallexample
6416 .section A
6417 .subsection 1
6418 .word 0x1234
6419 .subsection 2
6420 .word 0x5678
6421 .previous
6422 .word 0x9abc
6423 @end smallexample
6424
6425 Will place 0x1234 and 0x9abc into subsection 1 and 0x5678 into subsection 2 of
6426 section A. Whilst:
6427
6428 @smallexample
6429 .section A
6430 .subsection 1
6431 # Now in section A subsection 1
6432 .word 0x1234
6433 .section B
6434 .subsection 0
6435 # Now in section B subsection 0
6436 .word 0x5678
6437 .subsection 1
6438 # Now in section B subsection 1
6439 .word 0x9abc
6440 .previous
6441 # Now in section B subsection 0
6442 .word 0xdef0
6443 @end smallexample
6444
6445 Will place 0x1234 into section A, 0x5678 and 0xdef0 into subsection 0 of
6446 section B and 0x9abc into subsection 1 of section B.
6447
6448 In terms of the section stack, this directive swaps the current section with
6449 the top section on the section stack.
6450 @end ifset
6451
6452 @node Print
6453 @section @code{.print @var{string}}
6454
6455 @cindex @code{print} directive
6456 @command{@value{AS}} will print @var{string} on the standard output during
6457 assembly. You must put @var{string} in double quotes.
6458
6459 @ifset ELF
6460 @node Protected
6461 @section @code{.protected @var{names}}
6462
6463 @cindex @code{protected} directive
6464 @cindex visibility
6465 This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are
6466 @code{.hidden} (@pxref{Hidden}) and @code{.internal} (@pxref{Internal}).
6467
6468 This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
6469 their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to
6470 @code{protected} which means that any references to the symbols from within the
6471 components that defines them must be resolved to the definition in that
6472 component, even if a definition in another component would normally preempt
6473 this.
6474 @end ifset
6475
6476 @node Psize
6477 @section @code{.psize @var{lines} , @var{columns}}
6478
6479 @cindex @code{psize} directive
6480 @cindex listing control: paper size
6481 @cindex paper size, for listings
6482 Use this directive to declare the number of lines---and, optionally, the
6483 number of columns---to use for each page, when generating listings.
6484
6485 If you do not use @code{.psize}, listings use a default line-count
6486 of 60. You may omit the comma and @var{columns} specification; the
6487 default width is 200 columns.
6488
6489 @command{@value{AS}} generates formfeeds whenever the specified number of
6490 lines is exceeded (or whenever you explicitly request one, using
6491 @code{.eject}).
6492
6493 If you specify @var{lines} as @code{0}, no formfeeds are generated save
6494 those explicitly specified with @code{.eject}.
6495
6496 @node Purgem
6497 @section @code{.purgem @var{name}}
6498
6499 @cindex @code{purgem} directive
6500 Undefine the macro @var{name}, so that later uses of the string will not be
6501 expanded. @xref{Macro}.
6502
6503 @ifset ELF
6504 @node PushSection
6505 @section @code{.pushsection @var{name} [, @var{subsection}] [, "@var{flags}"[, @@@var{type}[,@var{arguments}]]]}
6506
6507 @cindex @code{pushsection} directive
6508 @cindex Section Stack
6509 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6510 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
6511 @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and @code{.previous}
6512 (@pxref{Previous}).
6513
6514 This directive pushes the current section (and subsection) onto the
6515 top of the section stack, and then replaces the current section and
6516 subsection with @code{name} and @code{subsection}. The optional
6517 @code{flags}, @code{type} and @code{arguments} are treated the same
6518 as in the @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}) directive.
6519 @end ifset
6520
6521 @node Quad
6522 @section @code{.quad @var{bignums}}
6523
6524 @cindex @code{quad} directive
6525 @code{.quad} expects zero or more bignums, separated by commas. For
6526 each bignum, it emits
6527 @ifclear bignum-16
6528 an 8-byte integer. If the bignum won't fit in 8 bytes, it prints a
6529 warning message; and just takes the lowest order 8 bytes of the bignum.
6530 @cindex eight-byte integer
6531 @cindex integer, 8-byte
6532
6533 The term ``quad'' comes from contexts in which a ``word'' is two bytes;
6534 hence @emph{quad}-word for 8 bytes.
6535 @end ifclear
6536 @ifset bignum-16
6537 a 16-byte integer. If the bignum won't fit in 16 bytes, it prints a
6538 warning message; and just takes the lowest order 16 bytes of the bignum.
6539 @cindex sixteen-byte integer
6540 @cindex integer, 16-byte
6541 @end ifset
6542
6543 @node Reloc
6544 @section @code{.reloc @var{offset}, @var{reloc_name}[, @var{expression}]}
6545
6546 @cindex @code{reloc} directive
6547 Generate a relocation at @var{offset} of type @var{reloc_name} with value
6548 @var{expression}. If @var{offset} is a number, the relocation is generated in
6549 the current section. If @var{offset} is an expression that resolves to a
6550 symbol plus offset, the relocation is generated in the given symbol's section.
6551 @var{expression}, if present, must resolve to a symbol plus addend or to an
6552 absolute value, but note that not all targets support an addend. e.g. ELF REL
6553 targets such as i386 store an addend in the section contents rather than in the
6554 relocation. This low level interface does not support addends stored in the
6555 section.
6556
6557 @node Rept
6558 @section @code{.rept @var{count}}
6559
6560 @cindex @code{rept} directive
6561 Repeat the sequence of lines between the @code{.rept} directive and the next
6562 @code{.endr} directive @var{count} times.
6563
6564 For example, assembling
6565
6566 @example
6567 .rept 3
6568 .long 0
6569 .endr
6570 @end example
6571
6572 is equivalent to assembling
6573
6574 @example
6575 .long 0
6576 .long 0
6577 .long 0
6578 @end example
6579
6580 A count of zero is allowed, but nothing is generated. Negative counts are not
6581 allowed and if encountered will be treated as if they were zero.
6582
6583 @node Sbttl
6584 @section @code{.sbttl "@var{subheading}"}
6585
6586 @cindex @code{sbttl} directive
6587 @cindex subtitles for listings
6588 @cindex listing control: subtitle
6589 Use @var{subheading} as the title (third line, immediately after the
6590 title line) when generating assembly listings.
6591
6592 This directive affects subsequent pages, as well as the current page if
6593 it appears within ten lines of the top of a page.
6594
6595 @ifset COFF
6596 @node Scl
6597 @section @code{.scl @var{class}}
6598
6599 @cindex @code{scl} directive
6600 @cindex symbol storage class (COFF)
6601 @cindex COFF symbol storage class
6602 Set the storage-class value for a symbol. This directive may only be
6603 used inside a @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pair. Storage class may flag
6604 whether a symbol is static or external, or it may record further
6605 symbolic debugging information.
6606 @end ifset
6607
6608 @ifset COFF-ELF
6609 @node Section
6610 @section @code{.section @var{name}}
6611
6612 @cindex named section
6613 Use the @code{.section} directive to assemble the following code into a section
6614 named @var{name}.
6615
6616 This directive is only supported for targets that actually support arbitrarily
6617 named sections; on @code{a.out} targets, for example, it is not accepted, even
6618 with a standard @code{a.out} section name.
6619
6620 @ifset COFF
6621 @ifset ELF
6622 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6623 @subheading COFF Version
6624 @end ifset
6625
6626 @cindex @code{section} directive (COFF version)
6627 For COFF targets, the @code{.section} directive is used in one of the following
6628 ways:
6629
6630 @smallexample
6631 .section @var{name}[, "@var{flags}"]
6632 .section @var{name}[, @var{subsection}]
6633 @end smallexample
6634
6635 If the optional argument is quoted, it is taken as flags to use for the
6636 section. Each flag is a single character. The following flags are recognized:
6637
6638 @table @code
6639 @item b
6640 bss section (uninitialized data)
6641 @item n
6642 section is not loaded
6643 @item w
6644 writable section
6645 @item d
6646 data section
6647 @item e
6648 exclude section from linking
6649 @item r
6650 read-only section
6651 @item x
6652 executable section
6653 @item s
6654 shared section (meaningful for PE targets)
6655 @item a
6656 ignored. (For compatibility with the ELF version)
6657 @item y
6658 section is not readable (meaningful for PE targets)
6659 @item 0-9
6660 single-digit power-of-two section alignment (GNU extension)
6661 @end table
6662
6663 If no flags are specified, the default flags depend upon the section name. If
6664 the section name is not recognized, the default will be for the section to be
6665 loaded and writable. Note the @code{n} and @code{w} flags remove attributes
6666 from the section, rather than adding them, so if they are used on their own it
6667 will be as if no flags had been specified at all.
6668
6669 If the optional argument to the @code{.section} directive is not quoted, it is
6670 taken as a subsection number (@pxref{Sub-Sections}).
6671 @end ifset
6672
6673 @ifset ELF
6674 @ifset COFF
6675 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6676 @subheading ELF Version
6677 @end ifset
6678
6679 @cindex Section Stack
6680 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6681 @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}), @code{.pushsection}
6682 (@pxref{PushSection}), @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and
6683 @code{.previous} (@pxref{Previous}).
6684
6685 @cindex @code{section} directive (ELF version)
6686 For ELF targets, the @code{.section} directive is used like this:
6687
6688 @smallexample
6689 .section @var{name} [, "@var{flags}"[, @@@var{type}[,@var{flag_specific_arguments}]]]
6690 @end smallexample
6691
6692 @anchor{Section Name Substitutions}
6693 @kindex --sectname-subst
6694 @cindex section name substitution
6695 If the @samp{--sectname-subst} command-line option is provided, the @var{name}
6696 argument may contain a substitution sequence. Only @code{%S} is supported
6697 at the moment, and substitutes the current section name. For example:
6698
6699 @smallexample
6700 .macro exception_code
6701 .section %S.exception
6702 [exception code here]
6703 .previous
6704 .endm
6705
6706 .text
6707 [code]
6708 exception_code
6709 [...]
6710
6711 .section .init
6712 [init code]
6713 exception_code
6714 [...]
6715 @end smallexample
6716
6717 The two @code{exception_code} invocations above would create the
6718 @code{.text.exception} and @code{.init.exception} sections respectively.
6719 This is useful e.g. to discriminate between ancillary sections that are
6720 tied to setup code to be discarded after use from ancillary sections that
6721 need to stay resident without having to define multiple @code{exception_code}
6722 macros just for that purpose.
6723
6724 The optional @var{flags} argument is a quoted string which may contain any
6725 combination of the following characters:
6726
6727 @table @code
6728 @item a
6729 section is allocatable
6730 @item d
6731 section is a GNU_MBIND section
6732 @item e
6733 section is excluded from executable and shared library.
6734 @item o
6735 section references a symbol defined in another section (the linked-to
6736 section) in the same file.
6737 @item w
6738 section is writable
6739 @item x
6740 section is executable
6741 @item M
6742 section is mergeable
6743 @item S
6744 section contains zero terminated strings
6745 @item G
6746 section is a member of a section group
6747 @item T
6748 section is used for thread-local-storage
6749 @item ?
6750 section is a member of the previously-current section's group, if any
6751 @item R
6752 retained section (apply SHF_GNU_RETAIN to prevent linker garbage
6753 collection, GNU ELF extension)
6754 @item @code{<number>}
6755 a numeric value indicating the bits to be set in the ELF section header's flags
6756 field. Note - if one or more of the alphabetic characters described above is
6757 also included in the flags field, their bit values will be ORed into the
6758 resulting value.
6759 @item @code{<target specific>}
6760 some targets extend this list with their own flag characters
6761 @end table
6762
6763 Note - once a section's flags have been set they cannot be changed. There are
6764 a few exceptions to this rule however. Processor and application specific
6765 flags can be added to an already defined section. The @code{.interp},
6766 @code{.strtab} and @code{.symtab} sections can have the allocate flag
6767 (@code{a}) set after they are initially defined, and the @code{.note-GNU-stack}
6768 section may have the executable (@code{x}) flag added. Also note that the
6769 @code{.attach_to_group} directive can be used to add a section to a group even
6770 if the section was not originally declared to be part of that group.
6771
6772 The optional @var{type} argument may contain one of the following constants:
6773
6774 @table @code
6775 @item @@progbits
6776 section contains data
6777 @item @@nobits
6778 section does not contain data (i.e., section only occupies space)
6779 @item @@note
6780 section contains data which is used by things other than the program
6781 @item @@init_array
6782 section contains an array of pointers to init functions
6783 @item @@fini_array
6784 section contains an array of pointers to finish functions
6785 @item @@preinit_array
6786 section contains an array of pointers to pre-init functions
6787 @item @@@code{<number>}
6788 a numeric value to be set as the ELF section header's type field.
6789 @item @@@code{<target specific>}
6790 some targets extend this list with their own types
6791 @end table
6792
6793 Many targets only support the first three section types. The type may be
6794 enclosed in double quotes if necessary.
6795
6796 Note on targets where the @code{@@} character is the start of a comment (eg
6797 ARM) then another character is used instead. For example the ARM port uses the
6798 @code{%} character.
6799
6800 Note - some sections, eg @code{.text} and @code{.data} are considered to be
6801 special and have fixed types. Any attempt to declare them with a different
6802 type will generate an error from the assembler.
6803
6804 If @var{flags} contains the @code{M} symbol then the @var{type} argument must
6805 be specified as well as an extra argument---@var{entsize}---like this:
6806
6807 @smallexample
6808 .section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"M, @@@var{type}, @var{entsize}
6809 @end smallexample
6810
6811 Sections with the @code{M} flag but not @code{S} flag must contain fixed size
6812 constants, each @var{entsize} octets long. Sections with both @code{M} and
6813 @code{S} must contain zero terminated strings where each character is
6814 @var{entsize} bytes long. The linker may remove duplicates within sections with
6815 the same name, same entity size and same flags. @var{entsize} must be an
6816 absolute expression. For sections with both @code{M} and @code{S}, a string
6817 which is a suffix of a larger string is considered a duplicate. Thus
6818 @code{"def"} will be merged with @code{"abcdef"}; A reference to the first
6819 @code{"def"} will be changed to a reference to @code{"abcdef"+3}.
6820
6821 If @var{flags} contains the @code{o} flag, then the @var{type} argument
6822 must be present along with an additional field like this:
6823
6824 @smallexample
6825 .section @var{name},"@var{flags}"o,@@@var{type},@var{SymbolName}|@var{SectionIndex}
6826 @end smallexample
6827
6828 The @var{SymbolName} field specifies the symbol name which the section
6829 references. Alternatively a numeric @var{SectionIndex} can be provided. This
6830 is not generally a good idea as section indicies are rarely known at assembly
6831 time, but the facility is provided for testing purposes. An index of zero is
6832 allowed. It indicates that the linked-to section has already been discarded.
6833
6834 Note: If both the @var{M} and @var{o} flags are present, then the fields
6835 for the Merge flag should come first, like this:
6836
6837 @smallexample
6838 .section @var{name},"@var{flags}"Mo,@@@var{type},@var{entsize},@var{SymbolName}
6839 @end smallexample
6840
6841 If @var{flags} contains the @code{G} symbol then the @var{type} argument must
6842 be present along with an additional field like this:
6843
6844 @smallexample
6845 .section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"G, @@@var{type}, @var{GroupName}[, @var{linkage}]
6846 @end smallexample
6847
6848 The @var{GroupName} field specifies the name of the section group to which this
6849 particular section belongs. The optional linkage field can contain:
6850
6851 @table @code
6852 @item comdat
6853 indicates that only one copy of this section should be retained
6854 @item .gnu.linkonce
6855 an alias for comdat
6856 @end table
6857
6858 Note: if both the @var{M} and @var{G} flags are present then the fields for
6859 the Merge flag should come first, like this:
6860
6861 @smallexample
6862 .section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"MG, @@@var{type}, @var{entsize}, @var{GroupName}[, @var{linkage}]
6863 @end smallexample
6864
6865 If both @code{o} flag and @code{G} flag are present, then the
6866 @var{SymbolName} field for @code{o} comes first, like this:
6867
6868 @smallexample
6869 .section @var{name},"@var{flags}"oG,@@@var{type},@var{SymbolName},@var{GroupName}[,@var{linkage}]
6870 @end smallexample
6871
6872 If @var{flags} contains the @code{?} symbol then it may not also contain the
6873 @code{G} symbol and the @var{GroupName} or @var{linkage} fields should not be
6874 present. Instead, @code{?} says to consider the section that's current before
6875 this directive. If that section used @code{G}, then the new section will use
6876 @code{G} with those same @var{GroupName} and @var{linkage} fields implicitly.
6877 If not, then the @code{?} symbol has no effect.
6878
6879 The optional @var{unique,@code{<number>}} argument must come last. It
6880 assigns @var{@code{<number>}} as a unique section ID to distinguish
6881 different sections with the same section name like these:
6882
6883 @smallexample
6884 .section @var{name},"@var{flags}",@@@var{type},@var{unique,@code{<number>}}
6885 .section @var{name},"@var{flags}"G,@@@var{type},@var{GroupName},[@var{linkage}],@var{unique,@code{<number>}}
6886 .section @var{name},"@var{flags}"MG,@@@var{type},@var{entsize},@var{GroupName}[,@var{linkage}],@var{unique,@code{<number>}}
6887 @end smallexample
6888
6889 The valid values of @var{@code{<number>}} are between 0 and 4294967295.
6890
6891 If no flags are specified, the default flags depend upon the section name. If
6892 the section name is not recognized, the default will be for the section to have
6893 none of the above flags: it will not be allocated in memory, nor writable, nor
6894 executable. The section will contain data.
6895
6896 For ELF targets, the assembler supports another type of @code{.section}
6897 directive for compatibility with the Solaris assembler:
6898
6899 @smallexample
6900 .section "@var{name}"[, @var{flags}...]
6901 @end smallexample
6902
6903 Note that the section name is quoted. There may be a sequence of comma
6904 separated flags:
6905
6906 @table @code
6907 @item #alloc
6908 section is allocatable
6909 @item #write
6910 section is writable
6911 @item #execinstr
6912 section is executable
6913 @item #exclude
6914 section is excluded from executable and shared library.
6915 @item #tls
6916 section is used for thread local storage
6917 @end table
6918
6919 This directive replaces the current section and subsection. See the
6920 contents of the gas testsuite directory @code{gas/testsuite/gas/elf} for
6921 some examples of how this directive and the other section stack directives
6922 work.
6923 @end ifset
6924 @end ifset
6925
6926 @node Set
6927 @section @code{.set @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
6928
6929 @cindex @code{set} directive
6930 @cindex symbol value, setting
6931 Set the value of @var{symbol} to @var{expression}. This
6932 changes @var{symbol}'s value and type to conform to
6933 @var{expression}. If @var{symbol} was flagged as external, it remains
6934 flagged (@pxref{Symbol Attributes}).
6935
6936 You may @code{.set} a symbol many times in the same assembly provided that the
6937 values given to the symbol are constants. Values that are based on expressions
6938 involving other symbols are allowed, but some targets may restrict this to only
6939 being done once per assembly. This is because those targets do not set the
6940 addresses of symbols at assembly time, but rather delay the assignment until a
6941 final link is performed. This allows the linker a chance to change the code in
6942 the files, changing the location of, and the relative distance between, various
6943 different symbols.
6944
6945 If you @code{.set} a global symbol, the value stored in the object
6946 file is the last value stored into it.
6947
6948 @ifset Z80
6949 On Z80 @code{set} is a real instruction, use @code{.set} or
6950 @samp{@var{symbol} defl @var{expression}} instead.
6951 @end ifset
6952
6953 @node Short
6954 @section @code{.short @var{expressions}}
6955
6956 @cindex @code{short} directive
6957 @ifset GENERIC
6958 @code{.short} is normally the same as @samp{.word}.
6959 @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
6960
6961 In some configurations, however, @code{.short} and @code{.word} generate
6962 numbers of different lengths. @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
6963 @end ifset
6964 @ifclear GENERIC
6965 @ifset W16
6966 @code{.short} is the same as @samp{.word}. @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
6967 @end ifset
6968 @ifset W32
6969 This expects zero or more @var{expressions}, and emits
6970 a 16 bit number for each.
6971 @end ifset
6972 @end ifclear
6973
6974 @node Single
6975 @section @code{.single @var{flonums}}
6976
6977 @cindex @code{single} directive
6978 @cindex floating point numbers (single)
6979 This directive assembles zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It
6980 has the same effect as @code{.float}.
6981 @ifset GENERIC
6982 The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
6983 @command{@value{AS}} is configured. @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
6984 @end ifset
6985 @ifclear GENERIC
6986 @ifset IEEEFLOAT
6987 On the @value{TARGET} family, @code{.single} emits 32-bit floating point
6988 numbers in @sc{ieee} format.
6989 @end ifset
6990 @end ifclear
6991
6992 @ifset COFF-ELF
6993 @node Size
6994 @section @code{.size}
6995
6996 This directive is used to set the size associated with a symbol.
6997
6998 @ifset COFF
6999 @ifset ELF
7000 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
7001 @subheading COFF Version
7002 @end ifset
7003
7004 @cindex @code{size} directive (COFF version)
7005 For COFF targets, the @code{.size} directive is only permitted inside
7006 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. It is used like this:
7007
7008 @smallexample
7009 .size @var{expression}
7010 @end smallexample
7011
7012 @end ifset
7013
7014 @ifset ELF
7015 @ifset COFF
7016 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
7017 @subheading ELF Version
7018 @end ifset
7019
7020 @cindex @code{size} directive (ELF version)
7021 For ELF targets, the @code{.size} directive is used like this:
7022
7023 @smallexample
7024 .size @var{name} , @var{expression}
7025 @end smallexample
7026
7027 This directive sets the size associated with a symbol @var{name}.
7028 The size in bytes is computed from @var{expression} which can make use of label
7029 arithmetic. This directive is typically used to set the size of function
7030 symbols.
7031 @end ifset
7032 @end ifset
7033
7034 @ifclear no-space-dir
7035 @node Skip
7036 @section @code{.skip @var{size} [,@var{fill}]}
7037
7038 @cindex @code{skip} directive
7039 @cindex filling memory
7040 This directive emits @var{size} bytes, each of value @var{fill}. Both
7041 @var{size} and @var{fill} are absolute expressions. If the comma and
7042 @var{fill} are omitted, @var{fill} is assumed to be zero. This is the same as
7043 @samp{.space}.
7044 @end ifclear
7045
7046 @node Sleb128
7047 @section @code{.sleb128 @var{expressions}}
7048
7049 @cindex @code{sleb128} directive
7050 @var{sleb128} stands for ``signed little endian base 128.'' This is a
7051 compact, variable length representation of numbers used by the DWARF
7052 symbolic debugging format. @xref{Uleb128, ,@code{.uleb128}}.
7053
7054 @ifclear no-space-dir
7055 @node Space
7056 @section @code{.space @var{size} [,@var{fill}]}
7057
7058 @cindex @code{space} directive
7059 @cindex filling memory
7060 This directive emits @var{size} bytes, each of value @var{fill}. Both
7061 @var{size} and @var{fill} are absolute expressions. If the comma
7062 and @var{fill} are omitted, @var{fill} is assumed to be zero. This is the same
7063 as @samp{.skip}.
7064
7065 @ifset HPPA
7066 @quotation
7067 @emph{Warning:} @code{.space} has a completely different meaning for HPPA
7068 targets; use @code{.block} as a substitute. See @cite{HP9000 Series 800
7069 Assembly Language Reference Manual} (HP 92432-90001) for the meaning of the
7070 @code{.space} directive. @xref{HPPA Directives,,HPPA Assembler Directives},
7071 for a summary.
7072 @end quotation
7073 @end ifset
7074 @end ifclear
7075
7076 @ifset have-stabs
7077 @node Stab
7078 @section @code{.stabd, .stabn, .stabs}
7079
7080 @cindex symbolic debuggers, information for
7081 @cindex @code{stab@var{x}} directives
7082 There are three directives that begin @samp{.stab}.
7083 All emit symbols (@pxref{Symbols}), for use by symbolic debuggers.
7084 The symbols are not entered in the @command{@value{AS}} hash table: they
7085 cannot be referenced elsewhere in the source file.
7086 Up to five fields are required:
7087
7088 @table @var
7089 @item string
7090 This is the symbol's name. It may contain any character except
7091 @samp{\000}, so is more general than ordinary symbol names. Some
7092 debuggers used to code arbitrarily complex structures into symbol names
7093 using this field.
7094
7095 @item type
7096 An absolute expression. The symbol's type is set to the low 8 bits of
7097 this expression. Any bit pattern is permitted, but @code{@value{LD}}
7098 and debuggers choke on silly bit patterns.
7099
7100 @item other
7101 An absolute expression. The symbol's ``other'' attribute is set to the
7102 low 8 bits of this expression.
7103
7104 @item desc
7105 An absolute expression. The symbol's descriptor is set to the low 16
7106 bits of this expression.
7107
7108 @item value
7109 An absolute expression which becomes the symbol's value.
7110 @end table
7111
7112 If a warning is detected while reading a @code{.stabd}, @code{.stabn},
7113 or @code{.stabs} statement, the symbol has probably already been created;
7114 you get a half-formed symbol in your object file. This is
7115 compatible with earlier assemblers!
7116
7117 @table @code
7118 @cindex @code{stabd} directive
7119 @item .stabd @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc}
7120
7121 The ``name'' of the symbol generated is not even an empty string.
7122 It is a null pointer, for compatibility. Older assemblers used a
7123 null pointer so they didn't waste space in object files with empty
7124 strings.
7125
7126 The symbol's value is set to the location counter,
7127 relocatably. When your program is linked, the value of this symbol
7128 is the address of the location counter when the @code{.stabd} was
7129 assembled.
7130
7131 @cindex @code{stabn} directive
7132 @item .stabn @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc} , @var{value}
7133 The name of the symbol is set to the empty string @code{""}.
7134
7135 @cindex @code{stabs} directive
7136 @item .stabs @var{string} , @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc} , @var{value}
7137 All five fields are specified.
7138 @end table
7139 @end ifset
7140 @c end have-stabs
7141
7142 @node String
7143 @section @code{.string} "@var{str}", @code{.string8} "@var{str}", @code{.string16}
7144 "@var{str}", @code{.string32} "@var{str}", @code{.string64} "@var{str}"
7145
7146 @cindex string, copying to object file
7147 @cindex string8, copying to object file
7148 @cindex string16, copying to object file
7149 @cindex string32, copying to object file
7150 @cindex string64, copying to object file
7151 @cindex @code{string} directive
7152 @cindex @code{string8} directive
7153 @cindex @code{string16} directive
7154 @cindex @code{string32} directive
7155 @cindex @code{string64} directive
7156
7157 Copy the characters in @var{str} to the object file. You may specify more than
7158 one string to copy, separated by commas. Unless otherwise specified for a
7159 particular machine, the assembler marks the end of each string with a 0 byte.
7160 You can use any of the escape sequences described in @ref{Strings,,Strings}.
7161
7162 The variants @code{string16}, @code{string32} and @code{string64} differ from
7163 the @code{string} pseudo opcode in that each 8-bit character from @var{str} is
7164 copied and expanded to 16, 32 or 64 bits respectively. The expanded characters
7165 are stored in target endianness byte order.
7166
7167 Example:
7168 @smallexample
7169 .string32 "BYE"
7170 expands to:
7171 .string "B\0\0\0Y\0\0\0E\0\0\0" /* On little endian targets. */
7172 .string "\0\0\0B\0\0\0Y\0\0\0E" /* On big endian targets. */
7173 @end smallexample
7174
7175
7176 @node Struct
7177 @section @code{.struct @var{expression}}
7178
7179 @cindex @code{struct} directive
7180 Switch to the absolute section, and set the section offset to @var{expression},
7181 which must be an absolute expression. You might use this as follows:
7182 @smallexample
7183 .struct 0
7184 field1:
7185 .struct field1 + 4
7186 field2:
7187 .struct field2 + 4
7188 field3:
7189 @end smallexample
7190 This would define the symbol @code{field1} to have the value 0, the symbol
7191 @code{field2} to have the value 4, and the symbol @code{field3} to have the
7192 value 8. Assembly would be left in the absolute section, and you would need to
7193 use a @code{.section} directive of some sort to change to some other section
7194 before further assembly.
7195
7196 @ifset ELF
7197 @node SubSection
7198 @section @code{.subsection @var{name}}
7199
7200 @cindex @code{subsection} directive
7201 @cindex Section Stack
7202 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
7203 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}),
7204 @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and @code{.previous}
7205 (@pxref{Previous}).
7206
7207 This directive replaces the current subsection with @code{name}. The current
7208 section is not changed. The replaced subsection is put onto the section stack
7209 in place of the then current top of stack subsection.
7210 @end ifset
7211
7212 @ifset ELF
7213 @node Symver
7214 @section @code{.symver}
7215 @cindex @code{symver} directive
7216 @cindex symbol versioning
7217 @cindex versions of symbols
7218 Use the @code{.symver} directive to bind symbols to specific version nodes
7219 within a source file. This is only supported on ELF platforms, and is
7220 typically used when assembling files to be linked into a shared library.
7221 There are cases where it may make sense to use this in objects to be bound
7222 into an application itself so as to override a versioned symbol from a
7223 shared library.
7224
7225 For ELF targets, the @code{.symver} directive can be used like this:
7226 @smallexample
7227 .symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@nodename}[ ,@var{visibility}]
7228 @end smallexample
7229 If the original symbol @var{name} is defined within the file
7230 being assembled, the @code{.symver} directive effectively creates a symbol
7231 alias with the name @var{name2@@nodename}, and in fact the main reason that we
7232 just don't try and create a regular alias is that the @var{@@} character isn't
7233 permitted in symbol names. The @var{name2} part of the name is the actual name
7234 of the symbol by which it will be externally referenced. The name @var{name}
7235 itself is merely a name of convenience that is used so that it is possible to
7236 have definitions for multiple versions of a function within a single source
7237 file, and so that the compiler can unambiguously know which version of a
7238 function is being mentioned. The @var{nodename} portion of the alias should be
7239 the name of a node specified in the version script supplied to the linker when
7240 building a shared library. If you are attempting to override a versioned
7241 symbol from a shared library, then @var{nodename} should correspond to the
7242 nodename of the symbol you are trying to override. The optional argument
7243 @var{visibility} updates the visibility of the original symbol. The valid
7244 visibilities are @code{local}, @code{hidden}, and @code{remove}. The
7245 @code{local} visibility makes the original symbol a local symbol
7246 (@pxref{Local}). The @code{hidden} visibility sets the visibility of the
7247 original symbol to @code{hidden} (@pxref{Hidden}). The @code{remove}
7248 visibility removes the original symbol from the symbol table. If visibility
7249 isn't specified, the original symbol is unchanged.
7250
7251 If the symbol @var{name} is not defined within the file being assembled, all
7252 references to @var{name} will be changed to @var{name2@@nodename}. If no
7253 reference to @var{name} is made, @var{name2@@nodename} will be removed from the
7254 symbol table.
7255
7256 Another usage of the @code{.symver} directive is:
7257 @smallexample
7258 .symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@@@nodename}
7259 @end smallexample
7260 In this case, the symbol @var{name} must exist and be defined within
7261 the file being assembled. It is similar to @var{name2@@nodename}. The
7262 difference is @var{name2@@@@nodename} will also be used to resolve
7263 references to @var{name2} by the linker.
7264
7265 The third usage of the @code{.symver} directive is:
7266 @smallexample
7267 .symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@@@@@nodename}
7268 @end smallexample
7269 When @var{name} is not defined within the
7270 file being assembled, it is treated as @var{name2@@nodename}. When
7271 @var{name} is defined within the file being assembled, the symbol
7272 name, @var{name}, will be changed to @var{name2@@@@nodename}.
7273 @end ifset
7274
7275 @ifset COFF
7276 @node Tag
7277 @section @code{.tag @var{structname}}
7278
7279 @cindex COFF structure debugging
7280 @cindex structure debugging, COFF
7281 @cindex @code{tag} directive
7282 This directive is generated by compilers to include auxiliary debugging
7283 information in the symbol table. It is only permitted inside
7284 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. Tags are used to link structure
7285 definitions in the symbol table with instances of those structures.
7286 @end ifset
7287
7288 @node Text
7289 @section @code{.text @var{subsection}}
7290
7291 @cindex @code{text} directive
7292 Tells @command{@value{AS}} to assemble the following statements onto the end of
7293 the text subsection numbered @var{subsection}, which is an absolute
7294 expression. If @var{subsection} is omitted, subsection number zero
7295 is used.
7296
7297 @node Title
7298 @section @code{.title "@var{heading}"}
7299
7300 @cindex @code{title} directive
7301 @cindex listing control: title line
7302 Use @var{heading} as the title (second line, immediately after the
7303 source file name and pagenumber) when generating assembly listings.
7304
7305 This directive affects subsequent pages, as well as the current page if
7306 it appears within ten lines of the top of a page.
7307
7308 @ifset ELF
7309 @node Tls_common
7310 @section @code{.tls_common @var{symbol}, @var{length}[, @var{alignment}]}
7311
7312 @cindex @code{tls_common} directive
7313 This directive behaves in the same way as the @code{.comm} directive
7314 (@pxref{Comm}) except that @var{symbol} has type of STT_TLS instead of
7315 STT_OBJECT.
7316 @end ifset
7317
7318 @ifset COFF-ELF
7319 @node Type
7320 @section @code{.type}
7321
7322 This directive is used to set the type of a symbol.
7323
7324 @ifset COFF
7325 @ifset ELF
7326 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
7327 @subheading COFF Version
7328 @end ifset
7329
7330 @cindex COFF symbol type
7331 @cindex symbol type, COFF
7332 @cindex @code{type} directive (COFF version)
7333 For COFF targets, this directive is permitted only within
7334 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. It is used like this:
7335
7336 @smallexample
7337 .type @var{int}
7338 @end smallexample
7339
7340 This records the integer @var{int} as the type attribute of a symbol table
7341 entry.
7342
7343 @end ifset
7344
7345 @ifset ELF
7346 @ifset COFF
7347 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
7348 @subheading ELF Version
7349 @end ifset
7350
7351 @cindex ELF symbol type
7352 @cindex symbol type, ELF
7353 @cindex @code{type} directive (ELF version)
7354 For ELF targets, the @code{.type} directive is used like this:
7355
7356 @smallexample
7357 .type @var{name} , @var{type description}
7358 @end smallexample
7359
7360 This sets the type of symbol @var{name} to be either a
7361 function symbol or an object symbol. There are five different syntaxes
7362 supported for the @var{type description} field, in order to provide
7363 compatibility with various other assemblers.
7364
7365 Because some of the characters used in these syntaxes (such as @samp{@@} and
7366 @samp{#}) are comment characters for some architectures, some of the syntaxes
7367 below do not work on all architectures. The first variant will be accepted by
7368 the GNU assembler on all architectures so that variant should be used for
7369 maximum portability, if you do not need to assemble your code with other
7370 assemblers.
7371
7372 The syntaxes supported are:
7373
7374 @smallexample
7375 .type <name> STT_<TYPE_IN_UPPER_CASE>
7376 .type <name>,#<type>
7377 .type <name>,@@<type>
7378 .type <name>,%<type>
7379 .type <name>,"<type>"
7380 @end smallexample
7381
7382 The types supported are:
7383
7384 @table @gcctabopt
7385 @item STT_FUNC
7386 @itemx function
7387 Mark the symbol as being a function name.
7388
7389 @item STT_GNU_IFUNC
7390 @itemx gnu_indirect_function
7391 Mark the symbol as an indirect function when evaluated during reloc
7392 processing. (This is only supported on assemblers targeting GNU systems).
7393
7394 @item STT_OBJECT
7395 @itemx object
7396 Mark the symbol as being a data object.
7397
7398 @item STT_TLS
7399 @itemx tls_object
7400 Mark the symbol as being a thread-local data object.
7401
7402 @item STT_COMMON
7403 @itemx common
7404 Mark the symbol as being a common data object.
7405
7406 @item STT_NOTYPE
7407 @itemx notype
7408 Does not mark the symbol in any way. It is supported just for completeness.
7409
7410 @item gnu_unique_object
7411 Marks the symbol as being a globally unique data object. The dynamic linker
7412 will make sure that in the entire process there is just one symbol with this
7413 name and type in use. (This is only supported on assemblers targeting GNU
7414 systems).
7415
7416 @end table
7417
7418 Changing between incompatible types other than from/to STT_NOTYPE will
7419 result in a diagnostic. An intermediate change to STT_NOTYPE will silence
7420 this.
7421
7422 Note: Some targets support extra types in addition to those listed above.
7423
7424 @end ifset
7425 @end ifset
7426
7427 @node Uleb128
7428 @section @code{.uleb128 @var{expressions}}
7429
7430 @cindex @code{uleb128} directive
7431 @var{uleb128} stands for ``unsigned little endian base 128.'' This is a
7432 compact, variable length representation of numbers used by the DWARF
7433 symbolic debugging format. @xref{Sleb128, ,@code{.sleb128}}.
7434
7435 @ifset COFF
7436 @node Val
7437 @section @code{.val @var{addr}}
7438
7439 @cindex @code{val} directive
7440 @cindex COFF value attribute
7441 @cindex value attribute, COFF
7442 This directive, permitted only within @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs,
7443 records the address @var{addr} as the value attribute of a symbol table
7444 entry.
7445 @end ifset
7446
7447 @ifset ELF
7448 @node Version
7449 @section @code{.version "@var{string}"}
7450
7451 @cindex @code{version} directive
7452 This directive creates a @code{.note} section and places into it an ELF
7453 formatted note of type NT_VERSION. The note's name is set to @code{string}.
7454 @end ifset
7455
7456 @ifset ELF
7457 @node VTableEntry
7458 @section @code{.vtable_entry @var{table}, @var{offset}}
7459
7460 @cindex @code{vtable_entry} directive
7461 This directive finds or creates a symbol @code{table} and creates a
7462 @code{VTABLE_ENTRY} relocation for it with an addend of @code{offset}.
7463
7464 @node VTableInherit
7465 @section @code{.vtable_inherit @var{child}, @var{parent}}
7466
7467 @cindex @code{vtable_inherit} directive
7468 This directive finds the symbol @code{child} and finds or creates the symbol
7469 @code{parent} and then creates a @code{VTABLE_INHERIT} relocation for the
7470 parent whose addend is the value of the child symbol. As a special case the
7471 parent name of @code{0} is treated as referring to the @code{*ABS*} section.
7472 @end ifset
7473
7474 @node Warning
7475 @section @code{.warning "@var{string}"}
7476 @cindex warning directive
7477 Similar to the directive @code{.error}
7478 (@pxref{Error,,@code{.error "@var{string}"}}), but just emits a warning.
7479
7480 @node Weak
7481 @section @code{.weak @var{names}}
7482
7483 @cindex @code{weak} directive
7484 This directive sets the weak attribute on the comma separated list of symbol
7485 @code{names}. If the symbols do not already exist, they will be created.
7486
7487 On COFF targets other than PE, weak symbols are a GNU extension. This
7488 directive sets the weak attribute on the comma separated list of symbol
7489 @code{names}. If the symbols do not already exist, they will be created.
7490
7491 On the PE target, weak symbols are supported natively as weak aliases.
7492 When a weak symbol is created that is not an alias, GAS creates an
7493 alternate symbol to hold the default value.
7494
7495 @node Weakref
7496 @section @code{.weakref @var{alias}, @var{target}}
7497
7498 @cindex @code{weakref} directive
7499 This directive creates an alias to the target symbol that enables the symbol to
7500 be referenced with weak-symbol semantics, but without actually making it weak.
7501 If direct references or definitions of the symbol are present, then the symbol
7502 will not be weak, but if all references to it are through weak references, the
7503 symbol will be marked as weak in the symbol table.
7504
7505 The effect is equivalent to moving all references to the alias to a separate
7506 assembly source file, renaming the alias to the symbol in it, declaring the
7507 symbol as weak there, and running a reloadable link to merge the object files
7508 resulting from the assembly of the new source file and the old source file that
7509 had the references to the alias removed.
7510
7511 The alias itself never makes to the symbol table, and is entirely handled
7512 within the assembler.
7513
7514 @node Word
7515 @section @code{.word @var{expressions}}
7516
7517 @cindex @code{word} directive
7518 This directive expects zero or more @var{expressions}, of any section,
7519 separated by commas.
7520 @ifclear GENERIC
7521 @ifset W32
7522 For each expression, @command{@value{AS}} emits a 32-bit number.
7523 @end ifset
7524 @ifset W16
7525 For each expression, @command{@value{AS}} emits a 16-bit number.
7526 @end ifset
7527 @end ifclear
7528 @ifset GENERIC
7529
7530 The size of the number emitted, and its byte order,
7531 depend on what target computer the assembly is for.
7532 @end ifset
7533
7534 @c on sparc the "special treatment to support compilers" doesn't
7535 @c happen---32-bit addressability, period; no long/short jumps.
7536 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
7537 @cindex difference tables altered
7538 @cindex altered difference tables
7539 @quotation
7540 @emph{Warning: Special Treatment to support Compilers}
7541 @end quotation
7542
7543 @ifset GENERIC
7544 Machines with a 32-bit address space, but that do less than 32-bit
7545 addressing, require the following special treatment. If the machine of
7546 interest to you does 32-bit addressing (or doesn't require it;
7547 @pxref{Machine Dependencies}), you can ignore this issue.
7548
7549 @end ifset
7550 In order to assemble compiler output into something that works,
7551 @command{@value{AS}} occasionally does strange things to @samp{.word} directives.
7552 Directives of the form @samp{.word sym1-sym2} are often emitted by
7553 compilers as part of jump tables. Therefore, when @command{@value{AS}} assembles a
7554 directive of the form @samp{.word sym1-sym2}, and the difference between
7555 @code{sym1} and @code{sym2} does not fit in 16 bits, @command{@value{AS}}
7556 creates a @dfn{secondary jump table}, immediately before the next label.
7557 This secondary jump table is preceded by a short-jump to the
7558 first byte after the secondary table. This short-jump prevents the flow
7559 of control from accidentally falling into the new table. Inside the
7560 table is a long-jump to @code{sym2}. The original @samp{.word}
7561 contains @code{sym1} minus the address of the long-jump to
7562 @code{sym2}.
7563
7564 If there were several occurrences of @samp{.word sym1-sym2} before the
7565 secondary jump table, all of them are adjusted. If there was a
7566 @samp{.word sym3-sym4}, that also did not fit in sixteen bits, a
7567 long-jump to @code{sym4} is included in the secondary jump table,
7568 and the @code{.word} directives are adjusted to contain @code{sym3}
7569 minus the address of the long-jump to @code{sym4}; and so on, for as many
7570 entries in the original jump table as necessary.
7571
7572 @ifset INTERNALS
7573 @emph{This feature may be disabled by compiling @command{@value{AS}} with the
7574 @samp{-DWORKING_DOT_WORD} option.} This feature is likely to confuse
7575 assembly language programmers.
7576 @end ifset
7577 @end ifset
7578 @c end DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
7579
7580 @ifclear no-space-dir
7581 @node Zero
7582 @section @code{.zero @var{size}}
7583
7584 @cindex @code{zero} directive
7585 @cindex filling memory with zero bytes
7586 This directive emits @var{size} 0-valued bytes. @var{size} must be an absolute
7587 expression. This directive is actually an alias for the @samp{.skip} directive
7588 so it can take an optional second argument of the value to store in the bytes
7589 instead of zero. Using @samp{.zero} in this way would be confusing however.
7590 @end ifclear
7591
7592 @node 2byte
7593 @section @code{.2byte @var{expression} [, @var{expression}]*}
7594 @cindex @code{2byte} directive
7595 @cindex two-byte integer
7596 @cindex integer, 2-byte
7597
7598 This directive expects zero or more expressions, separated by commas. If there
7599 are no expressions then the directive does nothing. Otherwise each expression
7600 is evaluated in turn and placed in the next two bytes of the current output
7601 section, using the endian model of the target. If an expression will not fit
7602 in two bytes, a warning message is displayed and the least significant two
7603 bytes of the expression's value are used. If an expression cannot be evaluated
7604 at assembly time then relocations will be generated in order to compute the
7605 value at link time.
7606
7607 This directive does not apply any alignment before or after inserting the
7608 values. As a result of this, if relocations are generated, they may be
7609 different from those used for inserting values with a guaranteed alignment.
7610
7611 @node 4byte
7612 @section @code{.4byte @var{expression} [, @var{expression}]*}
7613 @cindex @code{4byte} directive
7614 @cindex four-byte integer
7615 @cindex integer, 4-byte
7616
7617 Like the @option{.2byte} directive, except that it inserts unaligned, four byte
7618 long values into the output.
7619
7620 @node 8byte
7621 @section @code{.8byte @var{expression} [, @var{expression}]*}
7622 @cindex @code{8byte} directive
7623 @cindex eight-byte integer
7624 @cindex integer, 8-byte
7625
7626 Like the @option{.2byte} directive, except that it inserts unaligned, eight
7627 byte long bignum values into the output.
7628
7629 @node Deprecated
7630 @section Deprecated Directives
7631
7632 @cindex deprecated directives
7633 @cindex obsolescent directives
7634 One day these directives won't work.
7635 They are included for compatibility with older assemblers.
7636 @table @t
7637 @item .abort
7638 @item .line
7639 @end table
7640
7641 @ifset ELF
7642 @node Object Attributes
7643 @chapter Object Attributes
7644 @cindex object attributes
7645
7646 @command{@value{AS}} assembles source files written for a specific architecture
7647 into object files for that architecture. But not all object files are alike.
7648 Many architectures support incompatible variations. For instance, floating
7649 point arguments might be passed in floating point registers if the object file
7650 requires hardware floating point support---or floating point arguments might be
7651 passed in integer registers if the object file supports processors with no
7652 hardware floating point unit. Or, if two objects are built for different
7653 generations of the same architecture, the combination may require the
7654 newer generation at run-time.
7655
7656 This information is useful during and after linking. At link time,
7657 @command{@value{LD}} can warn about incompatible object files. After link
7658 time, tools like @command{gdb} can use it to process the linked file
7659 correctly.
7660
7661 Compatibility information is recorded as a series of object attributes. Each
7662 attribute has a @dfn{vendor}, @dfn{tag}, and @dfn{value}. The vendor is a
7663 string, and indicates who sets the meaning of the tag. The tag is an integer,
7664 and indicates what property the attribute describes. The value may be a string
7665 or an integer, and indicates how the property affects this object. Missing
7666 attributes are the same as attributes with a zero value or empty string value.
7667
7668 Object attributes were developed as part of the ABI for the ARM Architecture.
7669 The file format is documented in @cite{ELF for the ARM Architecture}.
7670
7671 @menu
7672 * GNU Object Attributes:: @sc{gnu} Object Attributes
7673 * Defining New Object Attributes:: Defining New Object Attributes
7674 @end menu
7675
7676 @node GNU Object Attributes
7677 @section @sc{gnu} Object Attributes
7678
7679 The @code{.gnu_attribute} directive records an object attribute
7680 with vendor @samp{gnu}.
7681
7682 Except for @samp{Tag_compatibility}, which has both an integer and a string for
7683 its value, @sc{gnu} attributes have a string value if the tag number is odd and
7684 an integer value if the tag number is even. The second bit (@code{@var{tag} &
7685 2} is set for architecture-independent attributes and clear for
7686 architecture-dependent ones.
7687
7688 @subsection Common @sc{gnu} attributes
7689
7690 These attributes are valid on all architectures.
7691
7692 @table @r
7693 @item Tag_compatibility (32)
7694 The compatibility attribute takes an integer flag value and a vendor name. If
7695 the flag value is 0, the file is compatible with other toolchains. If it is 1,
7696 then the file is only compatible with the named toolchain. If it is greater
7697 than 1, the file can only be processed by other toolchains under some private
7698 arrangement indicated by the flag value and the vendor name.
7699 @end table
7700
7701 @subsection M680x0 Attributes
7702
7703 @table @r
7704 @item Tag_GNU_M68K_ABI_FP (4)
7705 The floating-point ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
7706
7707 @itemize @bullet
7708 @item
7709 0 for files not affected by the floating-point ABI.
7710 @item
7711 1 for files using double-precision hardware floating-point ABI.
7712 @item
7713 2 for files using the software floating-point ABI.
7714 @end itemize
7715 @end table
7716
7717 @subsection MIPS Attributes
7718
7719 @table @r
7720 @item Tag_GNU_MIPS_ABI_FP (4)
7721 The floating-point ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
7722
7723 @itemize @bullet
7724 @item
7725 0 for files not affected by the floating-point ABI.
7726 @item
7727 1 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with a standard
7728 double-precision FPU.
7729 @item
7730 2 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with a single-precision FPU.
7731 @item
7732 3 for files using the software floating-point ABI.
7733 @item
7734 4 for files using the deprecated hardware floating-point ABI which used 64-bit
7735 floating-point registers, 32-bit general-purpose registers and increased the
7736 number of callee-saved floating-point registers.
7737 @item
7738 5 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with a double-precision FPU
7739 with either 32-bit or 64-bit floating-point registers and 32-bit
7740 general-purpose registers.
7741 @item
7742 6 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with 64-bit floating-point
7743 registers and 32-bit general-purpose registers.
7744 @item
7745 7 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with 64-bit floating-point
7746 registers, 32-bit general-purpose registers and a rule that forbids the
7747 direct use of odd-numbered single-precision floating-point registers.
7748 @end itemize
7749 @end table
7750
7751 @subsection PowerPC Attributes
7752
7753 @table @r
7754 @item Tag_GNU_Power_ABI_FP (4)
7755 The floating-point ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
7756
7757 @itemize @bullet
7758 @item
7759 0 for files not affected by the floating-point ABI.
7760 @item
7761 1 for files using double-precision hardware floating-point ABI.
7762 @item
7763 2 for files using the software floating-point ABI.
7764 @item
7765 3 for files using single-precision hardware floating-point ABI.
7766 @end itemize
7767
7768 @item Tag_GNU_Power_ABI_Vector (8)
7769 The vector ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
7770
7771 @itemize @bullet
7772 @item
7773 0 for files not affected by the vector ABI.
7774 @item
7775 1 for files using general purpose registers to pass vectors.
7776 @item
7777 2 for files using AltiVec registers to pass vectors.
7778 @item
7779 3 for files using SPE registers to pass vectors.
7780 @end itemize
7781 @end table
7782
7783 @subsection IBM z Systems Attributes
7784
7785 @table @r
7786 @item Tag_GNU_S390_ABI_Vector (8)
7787 The vector ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
7788
7789 @itemize @bullet
7790 @item
7791 0 for files not affected by the vector ABI.
7792 @item
7793 1 for files using software vector ABI.
7794 @item
7795 2 for files using hardware vector ABI.
7796 @end itemize
7797 @end table
7798
7799 @subsection MSP430 Attributes
7800
7801 @table @r
7802 @item Tag_GNU_MSP430_Data_Region (4)
7803 The data region used by this object file. The value will be:
7804
7805 @itemize @bullet
7806 @item
7807 0 for files not using the large memory model.
7808 @item
7809 1 for files which have been compiled with the condition that all
7810 data is in the lower memory region, i.e. below address 0x10000.
7811 @item
7812 2 for files which allow data to be placed in the full 20-bit memory range.
7813 @end itemize
7814 @end table
7815
7816 @node Defining New Object Attributes
7817 @section Defining New Object Attributes
7818
7819 If you want to define a new @sc{gnu} object attribute, here are the places you
7820 will need to modify. New attributes should be discussed on the @samp{binutils}
7821 mailing list.
7822
7823 @itemize @bullet
7824 @item
7825 This manual, which is the official register of attributes.
7826 @item
7827 The header for your architecture @file{include/elf}, to define the tag.
7828 @item
7829 The @file{bfd} support file for your architecture, to merge the attribute
7830 and issue any appropriate link warnings.
7831 @item
7832 Test cases in @file{ld/testsuite} for merging and link warnings.
7833 @item
7834 @file{binutils/readelf.c} to display your attribute.
7835 @item
7836 GCC, if you want the compiler to mark the attribute automatically.
7837 @end itemize
7838
7839 @end ifset
7840
7841 @ifset GENERIC
7842 @node Machine Dependencies
7843 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
7844
7845 @cindex machine dependencies
7846 The machine instruction sets are (almost by definition) different on
7847 each machine where @command{@value{AS}} runs. Floating point representations
7848 vary as well, and @command{@value{AS}} often supports a few additional
7849 directives or command-line options for compatibility with other
7850 assemblers on a particular platform. Finally, some versions of
7851 @command{@value{AS}} support special pseudo-instructions for branch
7852 optimization.
7853
7854 This chapter discusses most of these differences, though it does not
7855 include details on any machine's instruction set. For details on that
7856 subject, see the hardware manufacturer's manual.
7857
7858 @menu
7859 @ifset AARCH64
7860 * AArch64-Dependent:: AArch64 Dependent Features
7861 @end ifset
7862 @ifset ALPHA
7863 * Alpha-Dependent:: Alpha Dependent Features
7864 @end ifset
7865 @ifset ARC
7866 * ARC-Dependent:: ARC Dependent Features
7867 @end ifset
7868 @ifset ARM
7869 * ARM-Dependent:: ARM Dependent Features
7870 @end ifset
7871 @ifset AVR
7872 * AVR-Dependent:: AVR Dependent Features
7873 @end ifset
7874 @ifset Blackfin
7875 * Blackfin-Dependent:: Blackfin Dependent Features
7876 @end ifset
7877 @ifset BPF
7878 * BPF-Dependent:: BPF Dependent Features
7879 @end ifset
7880 @ifset CR16
7881 * CR16-Dependent:: CR16 Dependent Features
7882 @end ifset
7883 @ifset CRIS
7884 * CRIS-Dependent:: CRIS Dependent Features
7885 @end ifset
7886 @ifset CSKY
7887 * C-SKY-Dependent:: C-SKY Dependent Features
7888 @end ifset
7889 @ifset D10V
7890 * D10V-Dependent:: D10V Dependent Features
7891 @end ifset
7892 @ifset D30V
7893 * D30V-Dependent:: D30V Dependent Features
7894 @end ifset
7895 @ifset EPIPHANY
7896 * Epiphany-Dependent:: EPIPHANY Dependent Features
7897 @end ifset
7898 @ifset H8/300
7899 * H8/300-Dependent:: Renesas H8/300 Dependent Features
7900 @end ifset
7901 @ifset HPPA
7902 * HPPA-Dependent:: HPPA Dependent Features
7903 @end ifset
7904 @ifset I80386
7905 * i386-Dependent:: Intel 80386 and AMD x86-64 Dependent Features
7906 @end ifset
7907 @ifset IA64
7908 * IA-64-Dependent:: Intel IA-64 Dependent Features
7909 @end ifset
7910 @ifset IP2K
7911 * IP2K-Dependent:: IP2K Dependent Features
7912 @end ifset
7913 @ifset LOONGARCH
7914 * LoongArch-Dependent:: LoongArch Dependent Features
7915 @end ifset
7916 @ifset LM32
7917 * LM32-Dependent:: LM32 Dependent Features
7918 @end ifset
7919 @ifset M32C
7920 * M32C-Dependent:: M32C Dependent Features
7921 @end ifset
7922 @ifset M32R
7923 * M32R-Dependent:: M32R Dependent Features
7924 @end ifset
7925 @ifset M680X0
7926 * M68K-Dependent:: M680x0 Dependent Features
7927 @end ifset
7928 @ifset M68HC11
7929 * M68HC11-Dependent:: M68HC11 and 68HC12 Dependent Features
7930 @end ifset
7931 @ifset S12Z
7932 * S12Z-Dependent:: S12Z Dependent Features
7933 @end ifset
7934 @ifset METAG
7935 * Meta-Dependent :: Meta Dependent Features
7936 @end ifset
7937 @ifset MICROBLAZE
7938 * MicroBlaze-Dependent:: MICROBLAZE Dependent Features
7939 @end ifset
7940 @ifset MIPS
7941 * MIPS-Dependent:: MIPS Dependent Features
7942 @end ifset
7943 @ifset MMIX
7944 * MMIX-Dependent:: MMIX Dependent Features
7945 @end ifset
7946 @ifset MSP430
7947 * MSP430-Dependent:: MSP430 Dependent Features
7948 @end ifset
7949 @ifset NDS32
7950 * NDS32-Dependent:: Andes NDS32 Dependent Features
7951 @end ifset
7952 @ifset NIOSII
7953 * NiosII-Dependent:: Altera Nios II Dependent Features
7954 @end ifset
7955 @ifset NS32K
7956 * NS32K-Dependent:: NS32K Dependent Features
7957 @end ifset
7958 @ifset OPENRISC
7959 * OpenRISC-Dependent:: OpenRISC 1000 Features
7960 @end ifset
7961 @ifset PDP11
7962 * PDP-11-Dependent:: PDP-11 Dependent Features
7963 @end ifset
7964 @ifset PJ
7965 * PJ-Dependent:: picoJava Dependent Features
7966 @end ifset
7967 @ifset PPC
7968 * PPC-Dependent:: PowerPC Dependent Features
7969 @end ifset
7970 @ifset PRU
7971 * PRU-Dependent:: PRU Dependent Features
7972 @end ifset
7973 @ifset RISCV
7974 * RISC-V-Dependent:: RISC-V Dependent Features
7975 @end ifset
7976 @ifset RL78
7977 * RL78-Dependent:: RL78 Dependent Features
7978 @end ifset
7979 @ifset RX
7980 * RX-Dependent:: RX Dependent Features
7981 @end ifset
7982 @ifset S390
7983 * S/390-Dependent:: IBM S/390 Dependent Features
7984 @end ifset
7985 @ifset SCORE
7986 * SCORE-Dependent:: SCORE Dependent Features
7987 @end ifset
7988 @ifset SH
7989 * SH-Dependent:: Renesas / SuperH SH Dependent Features
7990 @end ifset
7991 @ifset SPARC
7992 * Sparc-Dependent:: SPARC Dependent Features
7993 @end ifset
7994 @ifset TIC54X
7995 * TIC54X-Dependent:: TI TMS320C54x Dependent Features
7996 @end ifset
7997 @ifset TIC6X
7998 * TIC6X-Dependent :: TI TMS320C6x Dependent Features
7999 @end ifset
8000 @ifset TILEGX
8001 * TILE-Gx-Dependent :: Tilera TILE-Gx Dependent Features
8002 @end ifset
8003 @ifset TILEPRO
8004 * TILEPro-Dependent :: Tilera TILEPro Dependent Features
8005 @end ifset
8006 @ifset V850
8007 * V850-Dependent:: V850 Dependent Features
8008 @end ifset
8009 @ifset VAX
8010 * Vax-Dependent:: VAX Dependent Features
8011 @end ifset
8012 @ifset VISIUM
8013 * Visium-Dependent:: Visium Dependent Features
8014 @end ifset
8015 @ifset WASM32
8016 * WebAssembly-Dependent:: WebAssembly Dependent Features
8017 @end ifset
8018 @ifset XGATE
8019 * XGATE-Dependent:: XGATE Dependent Features
8020 @end ifset
8021 @ifset XSTORMY16
8022 * XSTORMY16-Dependent:: XStormy16 Dependent Features
8023 @end ifset
8024 @ifset XTENSA
8025 * Xtensa-Dependent:: Xtensa Dependent Features
8026 @end ifset
8027 @ifset Z80
8028 * Z80-Dependent:: Z80 Dependent Features
8029 @end ifset
8030 @ifset Z8000
8031 * Z8000-Dependent:: Z8000 Dependent Features
8032 @end ifset
8033 @end menu
8034
8035 @lowersections
8036 @end ifset
8037
8038 @c The following major nodes are *sections* in the GENERIC version, *chapters*
8039 @c in single-cpu versions. This is mainly achieved by @lowersections. There is a
8040 @c peculiarity: to preserve cross-references, there must be a node called
8041 @c "Machine Dependencies". Hence the conditional nodenames in each
8042 @c major node below. Node defaulting in makeinfo requires adjacency of
8043 @c node and sectioning commands; hence the repetition of @chapter BLAH
8044 @c in both conditional blocks.
8045
8046 @ifset AARCH64
8047 @include c-aarch64.texi
8048 @end ifset
8049
8050 @ifset ALPHA
8051 @include c-alpha.texi
8052 @end ifset
8053
8054 @ifset ARC
8055 @include c-arc.texi
8056 @end ifset
8057
8058 @ifset ARM
8059 @include c-arm.texi
8060 @end ifset
8061
8062 @ifset AVR
8063 @include c-avr.texi
8064 @end ifset
8065
8066 @ifset Blackfin
8067 @include c-bfin.texi
8068 @end ifset
8069
8070 @ifset BPF
8071 @include c-bpf.texi
8072 @end ifset
8073
8074 @ifset CR16
8075 @include c-cr16.texi
8076 @end ifset
8077
8078 @ifset CRIS
8079 @include c-cris.texi
8080 @end ifset
8081
8082 @ifset CSKY
8083 @include c-csky.texi
8084 @end ifset
8085
8086 @ifset Renesas-all
8087 @ifclear GENERIC
8088 @node Machine Dependencies
8089 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
8090
8091 The machine instruction sets are different on each Renesas chip family,
8092 and there are also some syntax differences among the families. This
8093 chapter describes the specific @command{@value{AS}} features for each
8094 family.
8095
8096 @menu
8097 * H8/300-Dependent:: Renesas H8/300 Dependent Features
8098 * SH-Dependent:: Renesas SH Dependent Features
8099 @end menu
8100 @lowersections
8101 @end ifclear
8102 @end ifset
8103
8104 @ifset D10V
8105 @include c-d10v.texi
8106 @end ifset
8107
8108 @ifset D30V
8109 @include c-d30v.texi
8110 @end ifset
8111
8112 @ifset EPIPHANY
8113 @include c-epiphany.texi
8114 @end ifset
8115
8116 @ifset H8/300
8117 @include c-h8300.texi
8118 @end ifset
8119
8120 @ifset HPPA
8121 @include c-hppa.texi
8122 @end ifset
8123
8124 @ifset I80386
8125 @include c-i386.texi
8126 @end ifset
8127
8128 @ifset IA64
8129 @include c-ia64.texi
8130 @end ifset
8131
8132 @ifset IP2K
8133 @include c-ip2k.texi
8134 @end ifset
8135
8136 @ifset LM32
8137 @include c-lm32.texi
8138 @end ifset
8139
8140 @ifset LOONGARCH
8141 @include c-loongarch.texi
8142 @end ifset
8143
8144 @ifset M32C
8145 @include c-m32c.texi
8146 @end ifset
8147
8148 @ifset M32R
8149 @include c-m32r.texi
8150 @end ifset
8151
8152 @ifset M680X0
8153 @include c-m68k.texi
8154 @end ifset
8155
8156 @ifset M68HC11
8157 @include c-m68hc11.texi
8158 @end ifset
8159
8160 @ifset S12Z
8161 @include c-s12z.texi
8162 @end ifset
8163
8164 @ifset METAG
8165 @include c-metag.texi
8166 @end ifset
8167
8168 @ifset MICROBLAZE
8169 @include c-microblaze.texi
8170 @end ifset
8171
8172 @ifset MIPS
8173 @include c-mips.texi
8174 @end ifset
8175
8176 @ifset MMIX
8177 @include c-mmix.texi
8178 @end ifset
8179
8180 @ifset MSP430
8181 @include c-msp430.texi
8182 @end ifset
8183
8184 @ifset NDS32
8185 @include c-nds32.texi
8186 @end ifset
8187
8188 @ifset NIOSII
8189 @include c-nios2.texi
8190 @end ifset
8191
8192 @ifset NS32K
8193 @include c-ns32k.texi
8194 @end ifset
8195
8196 @ifset OPENRISC
8197 @include c-or1k.texi
8198 @end ifset
8199
8200 @ifset PDP11
8201 @include c-pdp11.texi
8202 @end ifset
8203
8204 @ifset PJ
8205 @include c-pj.texi
8206 @end ifset
8207
8208 @ifset PPC
8209 @include c-ppc.texi
8210 @end ifset
8211
8212 @ifset PRU
8213 @include c-pru.texi
8214 @end ifset
8215
8216 @ifset RISCV
8217 @include c-riscv.texi
8218 @end ifset
8219
8220 @ifset RL78
8221 @include c-rl78.texi
8222 @end ifset
8223
8224 @ifset RX
8225 @include c-rx.texi
8226 @end ifset
8227
8228 @ifset S390
8229 @include c-s390.texi
8230 @end ifset
8231
8232 @ifset SCORE
8233 @include c-score.texi
8234 @end ifset
8235
8236 @ifset SH
8237 @include c-sh.texi
8238 @end ifset
8239
8240 @ifset SPARC
8241 @include c-sparc.texi
8242 @end ifset
8243
8244 @ifset TIC54X
8245 @include c-tic54x.texi
8246 @end ifset
8247
8248 @ifset TIC6X
8249 @include c-tic6x.texi
8250 @end ifset
8251
8252 @ifset TILEGX
8253 @include c-tilegx.texi
8254 @end ifset
8255
8256 @ifset TILEPRO
8257 @include c-tilepro.texi
8258 @end ifset
8259
8260 @ifset V850
8261 @include c-v850.texi
8262 @end ifset
8263
8264 @ifset VAX
8265 @include c-vax.texi
8266 @end ifset
8267
8268 @ifset VISIUM
8269 @include c-visium.texi
8270 @end ifset
8271
8272 @ifset WASM32
8273 @include c-wasm32.texi
8274 @end ifset
8275
8276 @ifset XGATE
8277 @include c-xgate.texi
8278 @end ifset
8279
8280 @ifset XSTORMY16
8281 @include c-xstormy16.texi
8282 @end ifset
8283
8284 @ifset XTENSA
8285 @include c-xtensa.texi
8286 @end ifset
8287
8288 @ifset Z80
8289 @include c-z80.texi
8290 @end ifset
8291
8292 @ifset Z8000
8293 @include c-z8k.texi
8294 @end ifset
8295
8296 @ifset GENERIC
8297 @c reverse effect of @down at top of generic Machine-Dep chapter
8298 @raisesections
8299 @end ifset
8300
8301 @node Reporting Bugs
8302 @chapter Reporting Bugs
8303 @cindex bugs in assembler
8304 @cindex reporting bugs in assembler
8305
8306 Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{@value{AS}} reliable.
8307
8308 Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or it may
8309 not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is to help the
8310 entire community by making the next version of @command{@value{AS}} work better.
8311 Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of @command{@value{AS}}.
8312
8313 In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
8314 information that enables us to fix the bug.
8315
8316 @menu
8317 * Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
8318 * Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
8319 @end menu
8320
8321 @node Bug Criteria
8322 @section Have You Found a Bug?
8323 @cindex bug criteria
8324
8325 If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
8326
8327 @itemize @bullet
8328 @cindex fatal signal
8329 @cindex assembler crash
8330 @cindex crash of assembler
8331 @item
8332 If the assembler gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
8333 @command{@value{AS}} bug. Reliable assemblers never crash.
8334
8335 @cindex error on valid input
8336 @item
8337 If @command{@value{AS}} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
8338
8339 @cindex invalid input
8340 @item
8341 If @command{@value{AS}} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
8342 is a bug. However, you should note that your idea of ``invalid input'' might
8343 be our idea of ``an extension'' or ``support for traditional practice''.
8344
8345 @item
8346 If you are an experienced user of assemblers, your suggestions for improvement
8347 of @command{@value{AS}} are welcome in any case.
8348 @end itemize
8349
8350 @node Bug Reporting
8351 @section How to Report Bugs
8352 @cindex bug reports
8353 @cindex assembler bugs, reporting
8354
8355 A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu} products. If
8356 you obtained @command{@value{AS}} from a support organization, we recommend you
8357 contact that organization first.
8358
8359 You can find contact information for many support companies and
8360 individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
8361 distribution.
8362
8363 @ifset BUGURL
8364 In any event, we also recommend that you send bug reports for @command{@value{AS}}
8365 to @value{BUGURL}.
8366 @end ifset
8367
8368 The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
8369 @strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
8370 fact or leave it out, state it!
8371
8372 Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the problem
8373 and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might assume that the
8374 name of a symbol you use in an example does not matter. Well, probably it does
8375 not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps the bug is a stray memory reference which
8376 happens to fetch from the location where that name is stored in memory;
8377 perhaps, if the name were different, the contents of that location would fool
8378 the assembler into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and
8379 give a specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
8380 and the most helpful.
8381
8382 Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix the bug if
8383 it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports on the assumption
8384 that the bug has not been reported previously.
8385
8386 Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
8387 bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
8388 respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
8389 You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
8390
8391 To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
8392
8393 @itemize @bullet
8394 @item
8395 The version of @command{@value{AS}}. @command{@value{AS}} announces it if you start
8396 it with the @samp{--version} argument.
8397
8398 Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
8399 the bug in the current version of @command{@value{AS}}.
8400
8401 @item
8402 Any patches you may have applied to the @command{@value{AS}} source.
8403
8404 @item
8405 The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
8406 version number.
8407
8408 @item
8409 What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{@value{AS}}---e.g.
8410 ``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
8411
8412 @item
8413 The command arguments you gave the assembler to assemble your example and
8414 observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important, list them
8415 all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is sufficient.
8416
8417 If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
8418 and then we might not encounter the bug.
8419
8420 @item
8421 A complete input file that will reproduce the bug. If the bug is observed when
8422 the assembler is invoked via a compiler, send the assembler source, not the
8423 high level language source. Most compilers will produce the assembler source
8424 when run with the @samp{-S} option. If you are using @code{@value{GCC}}, use
8425 the options @samp{-v --save-temps}; this will save the assembler source in a
8426 file with an extension of @file{.s}, and also show you exactly how
8427 @command{@value{AS}} is being run.
8428
8429 @item
8430 A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
8431 incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
8432
8433 Of course, if the bug is that @command{@value{AS}} gets a fatal signal, then we
8434 will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might not
8435 notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us a chance to
8436 make a mistake.
8437
8438 Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still say so
8439 explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your copy of
8440 @command{@value{AS}} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the C
8441 library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash and ours
8442 would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours fails to crash, we
8443 would know that the bug was not happening for us. If you had not told us to
8444 expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw any conclusion from our
8445 observations.
8446
8447 @item
8448 If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{@value{AS}} source, send us context
8449 diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or @samp{-p}
8450 option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file. If you even
8451 discuss something in the @command{@value{AS}} source, refer to it by context, not
8452 by line number.
8453
8454 The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
8455 sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
8456 @end itemize
8457
8458 Here are some things that are not necessary:
8459
8460 @itemize @bullet
8461 @item
8462 A description of the envelope of the bug.
8463
8464 Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
8465 which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
8466 changes will not affect it.
8467
8468 This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
8469 will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
8470 with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
8471 We recommend that you save your time for something else.
8472
8473 Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
8474 of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
8475 output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
8476 less time, and so on.
8477
8478 However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
8479 report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
8480
8481 @item
8482 A patch for the bug.
8483
8484 A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
8485 the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
8486 a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
8487 to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
8488
8489 Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{@value{AS}} it is very hard to
8490 construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path through
8491 the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be able to construct
8492 one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is fixed.
8493
8494 And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
8495 patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
8496 help us to understand.
8497
8498 @item
8499 A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8500
8501 Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8502 things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8503 @end itemize
8504
8505 @node Acknowledgements
8506 @chapter Acknowledgements
8507
8508 If you have contributed to GAS and your name isn't listed here,
8509 it is not meant as a slight. We just don't know about it. Send mail to the
8510 maintainer, and we'll correct the situation. Currently
8511 @c (October 2012),
8512 the maintainer is Nick Clifton (email address @code{nickc@@redhat.com}).
8513
8514 Dean Elsner wrote the original @sc{gnu} assembler for the VAX.@footnote{Any
8515 more details?}
8516
8517 Jay Fenlason maintained GAS for a while, adding support for GDB-specific debug
8518 information and the 68k series machines, most of the preprocessing pass, and
8519 extensive changes in @file{messages.c}, @file{input-file.c}, @file{write.c}.
8520
8521 K. Richard Pixley maintained GAS for a while, adding various enhancements and
8522 many bug fixes, including merging support for several processors, breaking GAS
8523 up to handle multiple object file format back ends (including heavy rewrite,
8524 testing, an integration of the coff and b.out back ends), adding configuration
8525 including heavy testing and verification of cross assemblers and file splits
8526 and renaming, converted GAS to strictly ANSI C including full prototypes, added
8527 support for m680[34]0 and cpu32, did considerable work on i960 including a COFF
8528 port (including considerable amounts of reverse engineering), a SPARC opcode
8529 file rewrite, DECstation, rs6000, and hp300hpux host ports, updated ``know''
8530 assertions and made them work, much other reorganization, cleanup, and lint.
8531
8532 Ken Raeburn wrote the high-level BFD interface code to replace most of the code
8533 in format-specific I/O modules.
8534
8535 The original VMS support was contributed by David L. Kashtan. Eric Youngdale
8536 has done much work with it since.
8537
8538 The Intel 80386 machine description was written by Eliot Dresselhaus.
8539
8540 Minh Tran-Le at IntelliCorp contributed some AIX 386 support.
8541
8542 The Motorola 88k machine description was contributed by Devon Bowen of Buffalo
8543 University and Torbjorn Granlund of the Swedish Institute of Computer Science.
8544
8545 Keith Knowles at the Open Software Foundation wrote the original MIPS back end
8546 (@file{tc-mips.c}, @file{tc-mips.h}), and contributed Rose format support
8547 (which hasn't been merged in yet). Ralph Campbell worked with the MIPS code to
8548 support a.out format.
8549
8550 Support for the Zilog Z8k and Renesas H8/300 processors (tc-z8k,
8551 tc-h8300), and IEEE 695 object file format (obj-ieee), was written by
8552 Steve Chamberlain of Cygnus Support. Steve also modified the COFF back end to
8553 use BFD for some low-level operations, for use with the H8/300 and AMD 29k
8554 targets.
8555
8556 John Gilmore built the AMD 29000 support, added @code{.include} support, and
8557 simplified the configuration of which versions accept which directives. He
8558 updated the 68k machine description so that Motorola's opcodes always produced
8559 fixed-size instructions (e.g., @code{jsr}), while synthetic instructions
8560 remained shrinkable (@code{jbsr}). John fixed many bugs, including true tested
8561 cross-compilation support, and one bug in relaxation that took a week and
8562 required the proverbial one-bit fix.
8563
8564 Ian Lance Taylor of Cygnus Support merged the Motorola and MIT syntax for the
8565 68k, completed support for some COFF targets (68k, i386 SVR3, and SCO Unix),
8566 added support for MIPS ECOFF and ELF targets, wrote the initial RS/6000 and
8567 PowerPC assembler, and made a few other minor patches.
8568
8569 Steve Chamberlain made GAS able to generate listings.
8570
8571 Hewlett-Packard contributed support for the HP9000/300.
8572
8573 Jeff Law wrote GAS and BFD support for the native HPPA object format (SOM)
8574 along with a fairly extensive HPPA testsuite (for both SOM and ELF object
8575 formats). This work was supported by both the Center for Software Science at
8576 the University of Utah and Cygnus Support.
8577
8578 Support for ELF format files has been worked on by Mark Eichin of Cygnus
8579 Support (original, incomplete implementation for SPARC), Pete Hoogenboom and
8580 Jeff Law at the University of Utah (HPPA mainly), Michael Meissner of the Open
8581 Software Foundation (i386 mainly), and Ken Raeburn of Cygnus Support (sparc,
8582 and some initial 64-bit support).
8583
8584 Linas Vepstas added GAS support for the ESA/390 ``IBM 370'' architecture.
8585
8586 Richard Henderson rewrote the Alpha assembler. Klaus Kaempf wrote GAS and BFD
8587 support for openVMS/Alpha.
8588
8589 Timothy Wall, Michael Hayes, and Greg Smart contributed to the various tic*
8590 flavors.
8591
8592 David Heine, Sterling Augustine, Bob Wilson and John Ruttenberg from Tensilica,
8593 Inc.@: added support for Xtensa processors.
8594
8595 Several engineers at Cygnus Support have also provided many small bug fixes and
8596 configuration enhancements.
8597
8598 Jon Beniston added support for the Lattice Mico32 architecture.
8599
8600 Many others have contributed large or small bugfixes and enhancements. If
8601 you have contributed significant work and are not mentioned on this list, and
8602 want to be, let us know. Some of the history has been lost; we are not
8603 intentionally leaving anyone out.
8604
8605 @node GNU Free Documentation License
8606 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License
8607 @include fdl.texi
8608
8609 @node AS Index
8610 @unnumbered AS Index
8611
8612 @printindex cp
8613
8614 @bye
8615 @c Local Variables:
8616 @c fill-column: 79
8617 @c End: